1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
124 \notefontcolor #0000ff
128 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
133 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
141 \paragraph_separation skip
144 \math_numbering_side default
145 \quotes_style english
149 \paperpagestyle default
151 \tracking_changes true
152 \output_changes false
154 \postpone_fragile_content false
158 \docbook_table_output 0
159 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
171 by the \SpecialChar LyX
176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
178 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation,
179 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
180 Documentation mailing list:
182 \begin_inset CommandInset href
184 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
196 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 \begin_inset Newline newline
204 \begin_inset Note Note
207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
208 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
209 \begin_inset Newline newline
214 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
222 \begin_layout Standard
223 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
224 LatexCommand tableofcontents
231 \begin_layout Chapter
235 \begin_layout Section
236 What is \SpecialChar LyX
240 \begin_layout Standard
242 is a document preparation system.
243 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
246 business letters and proposals,
248 It is unlike most other
249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
256 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core editing style.
257 That means that when you type a section header,
259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
288 takes care of the typesetting for you;
289 so you deal only with concepts,
293 \begin_layout Standard
294 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
299 If you haven't read it yet,
305 \begin_layout Standard
310 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
313 the format of all of the manuals.
314 If you don't read it,
315 you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
316 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
319 \begin_layout Section
324 \begin_layout Standard
325 Like most applications,
327 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its window.
328 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
329 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical scrollbar.
332 \begin_layout Standard
333 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
334 This is not a bug or an oversight,
336 When you read a book,
337 you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the next line.
338 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion,
339 hence the need for only a vertical scrollbar.
342 \begin_layout Standard
343 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
344 The first case is large images.
345 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen,
346 left click on the image and use the option
357 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than the \SpecialChar LyX
359 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
362 \begin_layout Standard
363 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
364 menus and toolbar buttons,
365 have a look at Appendix
370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
372 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
380 \begin_layout Section
384 \begin_layout Standard
385 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
387 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
389 Just select the manual you want to read from the
396 \begin_layout Section
397 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
401 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
408 \begin_layout Standard
409 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
410 can be configured via the menu
412 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
416 \begin_inset Index idx
421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
428 is able to inspect your system to see what programs,
431 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
432 packages are available.
433 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences settings.
434 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
435 was installed on your system,
436 you might have some items that you installed locally,
438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
442 \begin_inset space \space{}
445 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
447 which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
449 To force \SpecialChar LyX
450 to re-inspect your system use
452 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
456 \begin_inset Index idx
461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
462 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
468 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
469 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
472 \begin_layout Section
475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
477 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
484 \begin_layout Standard
485 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
486 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
487 installed but you will not be able to create PDFs.
488 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
489 every \SpecialChar LyX
490 document can still be output as plain text,
491 as Docbook or as XHTML.
494 \begin_layout Standard
495 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
497 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required files installed,
498 but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
501 \begin_layout Standard
502 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
503 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
504 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view from the menu
506 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
514 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
517 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
521 \begin_inset Index idx
526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
527 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
535 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
542 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
546 \begin_layout Chapter
547 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
551 \begin_layout Section
552 Basic File Operations
553 \begin_inset Index idx
558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
567 \begin_layout Standard
572 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word processor as well as some more advanced operations:
575 \begin_layout Itemize
598 \begin_layout Itemize
615 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
621 \begin_layout Itemize
644 \begin_layout Itemize
654 \begin_layout Itemize
664 \begin_layout Itemize
679 \begin_layout Itemize
685 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \begin_layout Itemize
721 arg "buffer-write-as"
727 \begin_layout Itemize
741 \begin_layout Itemize
747 \begin_layout Itemize
761 \begin_layout Itemize
776 \begin_layout Standard
777 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors,
778 with a few minor differences.
781 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
792 command lists the available templates.
793 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features and possibly propose text fragments for the document,
794 features and text you would otherwise need to set or enter manually.
795 They can be of use for certain classes,
796 especially those for writing letters (see section
801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
803 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
809 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a \SpecialChar LyX
812 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
818 \begin_layout Standard
819 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
852 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
853 to open a file or create a new one,
854 that big blank space on the screen is just that —
863 \begin_layout Standard
884 are useful if multiple people work on the same document at the same time.
888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
889 If you plan to do this,
890 you should check out the Version Control feature in \SpecialChar LyX
893 \begin_inset Flex Emph
896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
897 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
904 \begin_inset Flex Emph
907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
913 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
931 will reload the document from disk.
932 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document and want to restore it to the last saved version.
941 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify them as your changes.
944 \begin_layout Section
945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
947 name "sec:Safety-Nets"
952 Rescuing Files If Things Go Awry
955 \begin_layout Standard
957 lays much stress on safety.
958 We know how much effort you invest in your work,
959 and thus the last thing we want is that this work gets lost.
961 we cannot completely prevent bad things from happening:
963 might crash (although we put in all effort that it doesn't),
964 you might face a power outage while you are working on a document with unsaved changes,
965 disks might get corrupt or files might get lost or damaged during synchronization or simply because you deleted it by mistake.
968 provides a multi-layered safety net that will hopefully prevent you from major hassles.
969 This means that \SpecialChar LyX
970 does not simply make a backup file,
971 it makes several such files that might be useful in different scenarios.
972 Parts of this multi-layered net can be switched off,
973 if you prefer to go a bit more risky over having multiple files (see section
978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
980 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
985 but all measures are on by default to provide you with most possible security.
988 \begin_layout Standard
990 we elaborate on the diverse files and when they might become useful.
993 \begin_layout Subsection
997 \begin_layout Standard
1000 makes backup copies of files when they are saved.
1002 these files are stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same file name but the extension
1007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1016 If you prefer to have all backups in a central place (and maybe on a separate disk),
1021 in preferences (see section
1022 \begin_inset space ~
1026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1028 reference "sec:Paths"
1037 then all backups are stored there.
1038 In order to prevent file name clashes,
1039 the files then do not simply have the original file name,
1040 but also the path in their name,
1042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1056 !home!paula!work!myfile.lyx~
1061 \begin_layout Standard
1062 Note that some file managers hide backup files by default,
1063 and you need to enable
1064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1071 in order to see them.
1074 \begin_layout Standard
1075 Backup files provide the latest saved version of a document.
1076 They are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1078 but overwritten if new changes are saved in the original file.
1081 \begin_layout Subsection
1085 \begin_layout Standard
1088 also makes automatic snapshots of all opened documents that have unsaved changes in a regular time interval (which can be adjusted in preferences,
1090 \begin_inset space ~
1094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1096 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1101 As opposed to the backup files,
1102 these also contain unsaved changes and thus might be newer than the backups.
1105 \begin_layout Standard
1106 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name,
1108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1125 Auto-save snapshots are deleted when a document is closed normally,
1127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1131 with all changes saved.
1132 They are left on disk in case of non-normal termination (e.
1133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1137 program crash or power outage),
1138 and this is when they might become useful.
1141 \begin_layout Subsection
1145 \begin_layout Standard
1147 crashes and documents have unsaved changes,
1148 the program furthermore tries to write an emergency file,
1149 which is a version of the document containing all unsaved changes,
1150 even those that have been made after the latest snapshot.
1153 \begin_layout Standard
1154 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name but the extension
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1165 myfile.lyx.emergency
1168 When the respective document is reopened with \SpecialChar LyX
1170 the application recognizes the emergency file and asks you whether it should try to recover your file to that last state.
1173 and if this succeeds it will ask you next whether the emergency file can be deleted.
1174 Agree on this only after you checked that everything has been correctly recovered!
1177 \begin_layout Subsection
1178 Backup Files from Old \SpecialChar LyX
1182 \begin_layout Standard
1183 If you open a \SpecialChar LyX
1184 document for the first time with a new major version of \SpecialChar LyX
1186 it gets converted to the new file format (allowing for new features).
1189 keeps a copy of the old version,
1192 <filename>-lyxformat-<n>.lyx
1195 where <n> is the old format (e.
1196 \begin_inset space ~
1202 myfile-lyxformat-474.lyx
1205 Those files are stored at the same location than the backup files,
1206 that is alongside the original document or,
1208 in the backup directory.
1211 \begin_layout Standard
1212 As with backup files,
1213 these files are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1217 \begin_layout Subsection
1218 When to Use Which File?
1221 \begin_layout Standard
1222 Now why all these files?
1223 Because they have different purposes.
1227 \begin_layout Standard
1229 terminates unexpectedly,
1232 \begin_layout Enumerate
1233 first try to restore from the emergency file (by reopening the document in \SpecialChar LyX
1235 This file has the latest changes,
1236 even changes you made after the last auto-save snapshot has been made.
1239 \begin_layout Enumerate
1240 If the rescue file way did not work because there is no rescue file (e.
1241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1245 after a power outage) or the rescue file is damaged (it might happen in mean cases that the rescue files contains just that latest addition that makes \SpecialChar LyX
1247 look if there is an auto-save snapshot.
1249 remove the trailing # so that the file can be opened with \SpecialChar LyX
1250 (not the first # in order to keep the original file until you checked the snapshot) and see if that works for you.
1252 you will have lost five minutes of work in the worst case (with the default settings at least).
1255 \begin_layout Enumerate
1256 If there is no auto-save snapshot or this one is garbled as well,
1257 use the backup file.
1258 It does not have all the unsaved changes,
1259 but it might still be the most recent you can get.
1260 This is particularly the case if the original file itself got lost or is damaged.
1263 \begin_layout Standard
1264 The fourth type of file,
1265 the backup file from old versions,
1266 is useful if the conversion process did not work and results in a non-working document (although we put in all efforts to prevent this) or if you mistakenly opened and saved a document with a newer version (such as a development version) and actually want to keep on using the old version.
1269 \begin_layout Standard
1270 So much for the safety net.
1271 We hope you will not need it,
1273 that it catches you as high up as possible.
1274 Now let us return to the actual writing process.
1277 \begin_layout Section
1278 Basic Editing Features
1279 \begin_inset Index idx
1284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1293 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1300 \begin_layout Standard
1301 Like most modern word processors,
1303 can perform cut and paste operations on blocks of text,
1304 can move by character,
1307 and can delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1308 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1309 editing features and how to access them.
1310 We will start with cut and paste.
1313 \begin_layout Standard
1314 As you might expect,
1319 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands,
1320 along with various other editing features.
1321 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1325 \begin_layout Itemize
1331 \begin_inset Index idx
1336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1366 \begin_layout Itemize
1372 \begin_inset Index idx
1377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1407 \begin_layout Itemize
1413 \begin_inset Index idx
1418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1444 \begin_layout Itemize
1448 \begin_inset space ~
1454 \begin_layout Itemize
1458 \begin_inset space ~
1464 \begin_layout Itemize
1468 \begin_inset space ~
1472 \begin_inset space ~
1478 \begin_inset Index idx
1483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1492 \begin_inset Index idx
1497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1513 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1523 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 The first three are self-explanatory.
1531 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1532 and other programs using
1554 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted) so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1559 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1560 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1561 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table,
1562 the text will be pasted into individual cells.
1566 \begin_inset space ~
1571 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1572 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list entry.
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1579 \begin_inset space ~
1584 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard contents.
1585 Possible formats include HTML,
1590 \begin_inset space ~
1597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1606 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1612 \begin_inset space \space{}
1615 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short text which is often meaningless.)
1618 \begin_layout Standard
1622 \begin_inset space ~
1625 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1627 \begin_inset space ~
1631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1635 \begin_inset space ~
1644 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1645 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection is inserted as one paragraph.
1646 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1650 \begin_inset space ~
1656 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1657 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1662 \begin_inset space ~
1665 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1671 \begin_inset space ~
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1682 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1685 paste from the primary selection.
1686 This is normally the currently selected text.
1689 \begin_layout Standard
1692 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1694 \begin_inset space ~
1698 \begin_inset space ~
1706 \begin_inset space ~
1710 \begin_inset space ~
1716 Once you have found a word or expression,
1722 \begin_inset space ~
1737 shortcut) to skip the currently selected word,
1741 \begin_inset space ~
1753 arg "word-find-backward"
1756 shortcut) to search backwards.
1757 Even if you close the widget,
1767 arg "word-find-backward"
1770 will search further.
1773 \begin_layout Standard
1778 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1786 field and searches the next match.
1790 \begin_inset space ~
1795 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1798 \begin_layout Standard
1800 the following options are available:
1803 \begin_layout Itemize
1808 \begin_inset space ~
1813 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1814 If the toggle is set,
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1827 will not match the word
1828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1843 \begin_layout Itemize
1849 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1850 to only find complete words,
1852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1884 \begin_layout Itemize
1890 will limit search and replace,
1892 to the current cursor selection.
1895 \begin_layout Itemize
1901 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input,
1902 without pressing the
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1913 \begin_layout Itemize
1918 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has been reached without asking.
1919 If this is not checked,
1920 a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1921 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1922 so you need to put it back manually.
1925 \begin_layout Standard
1926 \paragraph_spacing single
1927 The widget also has a
1931 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search widget),
1932 hiding replace and options.
1938 button brings you back to the full size.
1941 \begin_layout Standard
1942 \paragraph_spacing single
1945 also offers an advanced
1948 \begin_inset space ~
1952 \begin_inset space ~
1957 feature that is described in section
1958 \begin_inset space ~
1962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1964 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1972 \begin_layout Standard
1976 \begin_inset space \space{}
1980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1988 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
1989 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an inset and pressing
1993 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
2000 \begin_layout Standard
2004 arg "inset-select-all"
2007 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
2008 When the cursor is inside an inset
2011 arg "inset-select-all"
2014 selects the content of the inset.
2018 arg "inset-select-all"
2021 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and then to the whole document.
2025 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
2028 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end of the document.
2031 \begin_layout Section
2033 \begin_inset Index idx
2038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2045 \begin_inset Index idx
2050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2059 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
2066 \begin_layout Standard
2067 If you make a mistake,
2068 you can easily recover from it.
2070 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
2073 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2076 or the toolbar button
2083 If you accidentally undo too much,
2086 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2089 or the toolbar button
2096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2103 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
2104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2107 steps to minimize memory overhead.
2110 \begin_layout Standard
2119 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
2121 However they will not undo or redo text character by character,
2122 but by blocks of text.
2125 \begin_layout Section
2127 \begin_inset Index idx
2132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2141 \begin_layout Standard
2142 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2145 \begin_layout Enumerate
2150 \begin_layout Itemize
2155 once anywhere in the edit window.
2156 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2160 \begin_layout Enumerate
2165 \begin_layout Itemize
2172 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2175 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2178 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2179 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2180 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected text.
2183 \begin_layout Itemize
2184 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2187 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2194 \begin_layout Enumerate
2202 \begin_layout Standard
2203 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2204 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2208 \begin_layout Section
2210 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2212 name "sec:Navigating"
2217 \begin_inset Index idx
2222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2231 \begin_layout Standard
2233 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2236 \begin_layout Itemize
2241 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2244 \begin_layout Itemize
2246 which is accessed either by the menu
2248 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2250 \begin_inset space ~
2255 or by the toolbar button
2258 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2264 \begin_layout Itemize
2265 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2267 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2270 and use the same menu to return to them.
2271 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2274 \begin_layout Standard
2278 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2283 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2284 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2286 \begin_inset space ~
2291 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2292 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your last editing position.
2295 \begin_layout Standard
2300 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2304 \begin_layout Subsection
2306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2308 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2313 \begin_inset Index idx
2318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2320 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2335 \begin_inset Index idx
2340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2349 \begin_layout Standard
2350 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists of tables and figures,
2352 labels and cross-references (see section
2353 \begin_inset space ~
2357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2359 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2366 or citations (see section
2367 \begin_inset space ~
2371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2373 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2379 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your document.
2382 \begin_layout Standard
2383 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2384 For example with citations,
2385 the context menu allows you to open the citation dialog and to modify the citation.
2388 \begin_layout Standard
2393 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2395 if you are displaying the list of
2397 Labels and References
2399 and wish to see only references to subsections,
2400 you can enter the text
2401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2408 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2411 \begin_layout Standard
2412 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further control the display.
2417 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2418 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2423 option keeps it in the current view state.
2424 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2425 \begin_inset space ~
2428 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2429 \begin_inset space ~
2433 the subsections of sections
2434 \begin_inset space ~
2437 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2442 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2443 \begin_inset space ~
2448 the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2457 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2460 \begin_layout Standard
2467 button refreshes the TOC (useful while editing if you have changed sections in the document).
2468 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections in your document.
2481 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2483 you can move section
2484 \begin_inset space ~
2488 \begin_inset space ~
2491 2.4 or after section
2492 \begin_inset space ~
2497 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2510 (or the corresponding key bindings
2518 ) you can change the level of sections.
2519 You can make section
2520 \begin_inset space ~
2524 \begin_inset space ~
2528 \begin_inset space ~
2534 \begin_layout Standard
2535 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole section to copy,
2539 \begin_layout Subsection
2540 Horizontal Scrolling
2541 \begin_inset Index idx
2546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2548 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2558 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2575 \begin_layout Standard
2577 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats such as ISO
2578 \begin_inset space ~
2581 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2582 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2586 \begin_layout Standard
2587 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2591 \begin_layout Itemize
2593 is used on a small tablet computer
2596 \begin_layout Itemize
2597 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2609 \begin_inset space ~
2622 \begin_layout Itemize
2623 Math constructs with long command names
2626 \begin_layout Standard
2627 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2628 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor is moved.
2629 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2630 window so that table
2631 \begin_inset space ~
2635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2637 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2643 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the table.
2644 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2647 \begin_layout Standard
2648 \begin_inset Float table
2655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2656 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2661 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2665 Horizontal scrolling test.
2673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2675 \begin_inset Tabular
2676 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2677 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2678 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2679 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2680 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2722 \begin_layout Section
2723 Input/Word Completion
2724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2726 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2731 \begin_inset Index idx
2736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2743 \begin_inset Index idx
2748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2779 \begin_layout Standard
2781 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently opened.
2782 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that is used to propose completions.
2785 \begin_layout Standard
2786 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2789 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2794 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2801 \begin_inset space ~
2805 \begin_inset space ~
2810 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2814 \begin_inset space ~
2819 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2820 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2823 \begin_inset space ~
2829 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and popup completion,
2830 you can set the minimal number of characters a word must have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2833 \begin_layout Standard
2835 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are completions available.
2840 key to accept a proposed completion.
2841 If several completions are possible,
2842 a popup is opened showing them.
2843 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2850 \begin_layout Standard
2851 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the corresponding options for text.
2853 the special math option
2857 enables characters to be composed.
2859 if you want to insert the character
2860 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2864 you can input the characters
2865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2876 in a formula to create it.
2877 This is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the math toolbar.
2878 A list of supported character combinations can be found in the file
2882 located in \SpecialChar LyX
2883 's installation folder.
2888 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2889 In the example above,
2895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2926 \begin_layout Section
2928 \begin_inset Index idx
2933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2940 \begin_inset Index idx
2945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2947 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
2950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2962 \begin_inset Index idx
2967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2969 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
2972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2986 \begin_layout Standard
2987 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3003 which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3006 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3010 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3011 \begin_inset space ~
3015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3017 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3025 \begin_layout Standard
3030 \begin_inset space ~
3039 \begin_inset space ~
3064 do exactly what you expect them to do.
3068 \begin_layout Labeling
3069 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3073 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3074 LatexCommand nomenclature
3076 description "Tabulator key"
3083 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3085 If you do not understand this,
3087 \begin_inset space ~
3091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3093 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3101 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3108 \begin_inset space ~
3112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3114 reference "subsec:Lists"
3123 If you are still confused,
3129 \begin_inset Newline newline
3137 key is only used to accept proposed input completions,
3138 to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate.
3141 \begin_layout Labeling
3142 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3146 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3147 LatexCommand nomenclature
3149 description "Escape key"
3157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3166 to cancel operations.
3167 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3170 \begin_layout Labeling
3171 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3176 These move the cursor,
3178 to the beginning and end of a line,
3179 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning or end of the file.
3182 \begin_layout Standard
3183 There are three modifier keys:
3186 \begin_layout Labeling
3187 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3205 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3206 LatexCommand nomenclature
3208 description "Control key"
3213 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending on which keys it is used in combination with:
3217 \begin_layout Itemize
3227 it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3230 \begin_layout Itemize
3240 it moves by words instead of characters.
3243 \begin_layout Itemize
3253 it moves to the beginning and the end of the document,
3258 \begin_layout Labeling
3259 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3277 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3278 LatexCommand nomenclature
3280 description "Shift key"
3285 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3288 \begin_layout Labeling
3289 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3307 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3308 LatexCommand nomenclature
3310 description "Alt or Meta key"
3315 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards,
3316 unless your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3317 If you have both keys,
3318 you will need to try out which one actually performs the
3323 \begin_inset Newline newline
3326 This key does many different things,
3327 but it also activates the
3329 menu accelerator keys
3332 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a menu or menu item,
3333 it selects that menu item.
3337 \begin_layout Standard
3340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3346 \begin_inset space ~
3350 \begin_inset space ~
3356 \begin_inset space ~
3364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3383 \begin_inset space ~
3389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3399 \begin_layout Standard
3404 manual lists all other things bound to the
3412 \begin_layout Standard
3413 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3414 because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
3415 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered and any existing key bindings for that action.
3417 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3418 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding it.
3419 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned,
3421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3436 followed by a capital
3443 \begin_layout Chapter
3446 \begin_inset Index idx
3451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3454 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3471 \begin_layout Section
3473 \begin_inset Index idx
3478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3480 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3497 \begin_layout Subsection
3501 \begin_layout Standard
3502 Before you do anything else,
3503 before you ever start writing a document,
3504 you need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3505 Different types of documents use different types of spacing,
3510 different documents use different paragraph environments,
3511 and format the title of your document differently.
3514 \begin_layout Standard
3519 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3520 By setting the document class,
3521 you automatically select these properties,
3522 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3523 If you don't choose a document class,
3525 picks one for you by default.
3526 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3529 \begin_layout Subsection
3531 \begin_inset Index idx
3536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3538 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3555 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3562 \begin_layout Standard
3563 You can select a class using the
3565 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3566 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3570 \begin_inset Index idx
3575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3577 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3592 Select the class you want to use,
3593 and make any fine tunings of the options you may need.
3596 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3600 \begin_layout Standard
3601 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3606 \begin_layout Description
3607 Article for basic articles
3610 \begin_layout Description
3611 Report for basic reports
3614 \begin_layout Description
3615 Book for writing a book
3618 \begin_layout Description
3619 Letter for US-style letters
3622 \begin_layout Standard
3623 There are also some non-standard classes,
3624 which \SpecialChar LyX
3625 only uses if you have installed the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3627 though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3628 distributions will include many of these.
3629 Here are some of the classes.
3630 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3632 Special Document Classes
3641 \begin_layout Description
3642 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3645 \begin_layout Description
3646 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry Society
3649 \begin_layout Description
3650 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical Union
3653 \begin_layout Description
3654 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
3655 There are three article layouts available.
3656 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc.,
3657 that prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3658 All result-type statements (propositions,
3660 and so on) are sequenced together,
3663 and the like have their own sequence.
3665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3668 sequential numbering
3669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3672 scheme does not place the section number with each result,
3673 but numbers them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3674 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3675 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3678 \begin_layout Description
3679 Beamer Layout for presentations
3682 \begin_layout Description
3683 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3684 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3686 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
3690 \begin_layout Description
3691 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3694 \begin_layout Description
3696 \begin_inset space ~
3699 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3702 \begin_layout Description
3703 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3706 \begin_layout Description
3707 Foils Used to make transparencies
3710 \begin_layout Description
3711 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3712 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3714 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
3718 \begin_layout Description
3719 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3722 \begin_layout Description
3723 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3726 \begin_layout Description
3727 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3730 \begin_layout Description
3731 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes,
3732 offers many useful features like caption formatting,
3733 automatic print space calculation etc.
3734 (Is used by this document.)
3737 \begin_layout Description
3738 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3741 \begin_layout Description
3742 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3745 \begin_layout Description
3750 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical Society (APS),
3751 American Institute of Physics (AIP),
3752 and Optical Society of America (OSA).
3753 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3757 \begin_layout Description
3758 Slides Used to make transparencies
3761 \begin_layout Description
3763 \begin_inset space ~
3766 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3769 \begin_layout Description
3770 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3773 \begin_layout Standard
3774 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes here.
3775 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3777 Special Document Classes
3785 we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all of the document classes.
3788 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3792 \begin_layout Standard
3793 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3795 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3796 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3800 \begin_inset Index idx
3805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3807 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3830 If you open a document that uses such a class,
3831 you will receive a warning saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are not installed.
3832 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3835 \begin_layout Standard
3838 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
3845 are highly specialized.
3847 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
3848 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
3849 with a growing number.
3850 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3851 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed by some document class.
3852 There are just too many of them.
3853 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3856 \begin_layout Standard
3857 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3866 you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3867 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that document class for a new file.
3869 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3872 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3879 manual for information on how to install them.
3880 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3886 \begin_layout Standard
3887 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3888 provides support for many different sorts of documents,
3889 it does not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3891 many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3892 class files to be used for dissertations submitted to those universities.
3893 The \SpecialChar LyX
3894 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3897 users can write their own layout files,
3898 and many users have done so.
3901 Installing New Document Classes,
3909 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3912 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3916 name "subsec:Modules"
3921 \begin_inset Index idx
3926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3928 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3945 \begin_layout Standard
3946 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the chosen document class.
3947 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3948 This is not available in any document class,
3949 so you have to load the corresponding module in the
3955 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3959 \begin_inset Index idx
3964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3966 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3981 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what it does.
3984 \begin_layout Standard
3985 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3986 packages or file format converters that are not always installed by default.
3988 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter,
3989 and it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3990 You can still use the module while editing your file,
3991 but you will not be able to export to PDF or print your document,
3992 since \SpecialChar LyX
3993 will not be able to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3994 file without the missing prerequisites.
3995 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output,
3996 then you need to install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3999 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
4003 \begin_inset Index idx
4008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4009 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
4028 manual for more information on installing required packages.
4031 \begin_layout Standard
4032 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4041 Some modules require other modules,
4042 and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
4044 will advise you about these things.
4052 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4056 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
4061 \begin_inset Index idx
4066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4085 \begin_layout Standard
4086 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
4087 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
4089 They are intended to be used in a variety of different documents.
4090 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different documents,
4091 you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
4094 a particular document has very special needs,
4095 but you need a specific inset or text style only that one time.
4096 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
4098 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
4100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4116 manual for information on how to use it.
4119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4123 \begin_layout Standard
4124 Each class has a default set of options.
4125 Here's a quick table describing them:
4128 \begin_layout Standard
4129 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4135 \begin_layout Standard
4137 \begin_inset Tabular
4138 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4139 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4140 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4141 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4142 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4143 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4144 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4598 \begin_layout Standard
4599 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4605 \begin_layout Standard
4606 You're probably also wondering what
4607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4611 \begin_inset space ~
4615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4619 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4620 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4626 the rest do not and begin instead with the
4631 Some document classes,
4632 such as the ones for letters,
4633 don't use any section headings.
4654 We will describe these headings fully in section
4655 \begin_inset space ~
4659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4661 reference "subsec:Headings"
4669 \begin_layout Subsection
4671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4673 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4678 \begin_inset Index idx
4683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4685 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4700 \begin_inset Index idx
4705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4707 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4724 \begin_layout Standard
4725 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4727 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4734 \begin_inset space ~
4742 \begin_inset space ~
4748 you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated list.
4749 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4750 doesn't support special options you want to use for your document.
4751 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4752 -class and its options,
4753 you have to read its manual.
4756 \begin_layout Standard
4760 \begin_inset space ~
4767 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4773 \begin_inset space ~
4778 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4779 You can choose between the following five options:
4782 \begin_layout Labeling
4783 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4788 Use default page style of current class.
4791 \begin_layout Labeling
4792 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4797 No page numbers or headings.
4800 \begin_layout Labeling
4801 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4809 \begin_layout Labeling
4810 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4815 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4816 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4817 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the maximum sectioning level of the class.
4820 \begin_layout Labeling
4821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4826 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4832 \begin_inset Index idx
4837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4840 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4855 How they are defined is explained in section
4856 \begin_inset space ~
4860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4862 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4870 \begin_layout Standard
4871 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4872 \begin_inset space ~
4876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4878 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4886 \begin_layout Subsection
4887 Paper Size and Orientation
4888 \begin_inset Index idx
4893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4895 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4912 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4919 \begin_layout Standard
4920 You can find the following options in the menu
4923 \begin_inset space ~
4930 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4934 \begin_inset Index idx
4939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4941 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4958 \begin_layout Labeling
4959 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4963 \begin_inset space ~
4968 What size paper to print on.
4973 \begin_layout Itemize
4979 \begin_layout Itemize
4985 \begin_layout Itemize
4991 \begin_layout Itemize
4997 \begin_layout Itemize
5005 \begin_layout Itemize
5011 \begin_layout Itemize
5018 \begin_layout Labeling
5019 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5024 To choose whether to output as
5035 \begin_layout Labeling
5036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5040 \begin_inset space ~
5045 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
5046 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
5049 \begin_layout Subsection
5051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5053 name "subsec:Margins"
5058 \begin_inset Index idx
5063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5065 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5080 \begin_inset Index idx
5085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5094 \begin_layout Standard
5095 Paper margins are set in the menu
5097 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5101 \begin_inset Index idx
5106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5108 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5125 \begin_layout Standard
5126 If you use a KOMA-Script document class,
5127 you can use the default settings because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking the paper format and the font size into account.
5130 \begin_layout Subsection
5134 \begin_layout Standard
5135 If you change a document class,
5137 has to convert everything into the new class.
5138 That includes the paragraph environments.
5139 Some paragraph environments are standard,
5140 in so far as all of the document classes have them;
5141 but some classes have special paragraph environments.
5142 If this is the case,
5143 and you change the document class,
5145 will mark the paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
5146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5154 The name of the style is retained,
5155 in case you should want to go back to the old class.
5156 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting,
5157 so you will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
5160 \begin_layout Section
5161 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
5162 \begin_inset Index idx
5167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5169 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5186 \begin_layout Subsection
5188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5190 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
5197 \begin_layout Standard
5198 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments,
5199 we'd like to say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5202 \begin_layout Standard
5203 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5204 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5205 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5206 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5210 paragraph of a section,
5221 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5222 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document language than English.
5224 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5227 \begin_layout Standard
5228 The space between paragraphs,
5229 like the line spacing,
5230 the space between headings and text —
5232 all the spacing for just about everything —
5233 is pre-coded into \SpecialChar LyX
5236 you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5240 these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a range.
5243 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures fit on a page with text,
5244 so that sections don't start at the bottom of a page,
5249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5251 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5252 goes to produce a printable file.
5258 pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5260 gives you the ability globally to change
5264 these pre-coded spacings.
5265 We will explain more later.
5268 \begin_layout Subsection
5269 Paragraph Separation
5270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5272 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5277 \begin_inset Index idx
5282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5284 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5301 \begin_layout Standard
5309 \begin_inset space ~
5317 \begin_inset space ~
5324 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5328 \begin_inset Index idx
5333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5335 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5349 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs,
5353 \begin_layout Subsection
5357 \begin_layout Standard
5358 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5361 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5363 \begin_inset space ~
5368 dialog and toggle the
5371 \begin_inset space ~
5376 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5379 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5383 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation,
5384 this button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling this).
5387 \begin_layout Standard
5388 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5391 \begin_layout Subsection
5393 \begin_inset Index idx
5398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5400 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5417 \begin_layout Standard
5420 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5424 \begin_inset Index idx
5429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5431 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5445 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5448 \begin_inset space ~
5457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5458 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5464 \begin_inset Index idx
5469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5472 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5486 installed to use this feature.
5491 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5495 \begin_inset space ~
5500 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing is normally defined in the environment's style.
5503 \begin_layout Section
5504 Paragraph Environments
5505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5507 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5512 \begin_inset Index idx
5517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5519 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5534 \begin_inset Index idx
5539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5540 Paragraph environments
5548 \begin_layout Subsection
5552 \begin_layout Standard
5553 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5556 \begin_layout Standard
5565 } \SpecialChar ldots
5575 \begin_inset Newline newline
5578 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5580 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5582 or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally alien to you,
5583 we urge you to read the
5592 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5595 \begin_layout Standard
5596 A paragraph environment is simply a
5597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5604 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5605 This can include a particular style of font,
5612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5619 the different environments inside one another,
5620 allowing one environment to inherit some of the properties of another.
5621 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy tab stops,
5622 on the fly margin adjustment,
5623 and other hangovers from the days of typewriters.
5624 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular document type.
5625 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5628 \begin_layout Standard
5629 To choose a new paragraph environment,
5630 use the pull-down box
5631 \begin_inset Graphics
5632 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5638 at the left end of the toolbar.
5640 will change the environment of the
5644 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5645 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if you select them before choosing the new environment.
5648 \begin_layout Standard
5657 create a new paragraph using the
5661 paragraph environment.
5663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5670 because if you are in one of these environments:
5673 \begin_layout Itemize
5679 \begin_layout Itemize
5685 \begin_layout Itemize
5691 \begin_layout Itemize
5697 \begin_layout Itemize
5703 \begin_layout Itemize
5709 \begin_layout Itemize
5715 \begin_layout Standard
5717 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5722 rather than resetting it to
5727 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5728 \begin_inset space ~
5732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5734 reference "sec:Nesting"
5742 \begin_layout Subsection
5746 \begin_layout Standard
5747 The default paragraph environment is
5752 It creates a plain paragraph.
5754 resets the paragraph environment,
5755 this is the one it chooses.
5757 the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in this manual) are in the
5764 \begin_layout Standard
5765 You can nest a paragraph using the
5769 environment in just about anything else,
5770 but you can't really nest anything in a
5777 \begin_layout Subsection
5779 \begin_inset Index idx
5784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5786 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5803 \begin_layout Standard
5804 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5805 title page has three parts:
5807 the name(s) of the author(s) and a
5808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5815 for thanks or contact information.
5816 For certain types of documents,
5818 places all of this on a separate page along with today's date.
5819 For other types of documents,
5821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5828 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5831 \begin_layout Standard
5833 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph environments
5848 Here's how you use them:
5851 \begin_layout Itemize
5852 Put the title of your document in the
5859 \begin_layout Itemize
5860 Put the author name in the
5867 \begin_layout Itemize
5868 If you want the date to have a certain appearance,
5869 want to use a fixed date,
5870 or want other text to appear in place of today's date,
5871 put that text in the
5876 Note that using this environment is optional.
5877 If you don't provide any,
5879 will automatically insert today's date.
5880 If you don't want a date,
5883 Suppress default date on front page
5887 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5888 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5890 \begin_inset space ~
5898 \begin_layout Standard
5899 You can use footnotes to insert
5900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5907 or contact information.
5910 \begin_layout Subsection
5912 \begin_inset Index idx
5917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5926 name "subsec:Headings"
5933 \begin_layout Standard
5934 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5936 takes care of the numbering for you.
5939 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5941 \begin_inset Index idx
5946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5948 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5965 \begin_layout Standard
5966 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5970 \begin_layout Enumerate
5976 \begin_layout Enumerate
5982 \begin_layout Enumerate
5988 \begin_layout Enumerate
5994 \begin_layout Enumerate
6000 \begin_layout Enumerate
6006 \begin_layout Enumerate
6012 \begin_layout Standard
6014 labels each heading with a series of numbers,
6015 separated by periods.
6016 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
6017 Unlike the other headings,
6018 parts are numbered with Roman numerals.
6021 \begin_layout Standard
6022 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
6024 suppose you're writing a book.
6025 You group the book into chapters.
6027 does a similar grouping:
6030 \begin_layout Itemize
6035 is divided into either
6046 \begin_layout Itemize
6058 \begin_layout Itemize
6070 \begin_layout Itemize
6082 \begin_layout Itemize
6094 \begin_layout Itemize
6106 \begin_layout Standard
6107 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6116 Not all document types use the
6120 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
6125 is the top-level heading.
6133 \begin_layout Standard
6139 environment to label a new sub-subsection,
6141 labels it with its number,
6142 along with the number of the subsection,
6145 chapter that it's in.
6147 the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the label
6148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6158 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6160 \begin_inset Index idx
6165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6167 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6184 \begin_layout Standard
6185 The unnumbered section headings have a
6186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6193 at the end of their name.
6194 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in the table of contents,
6196 \begin_inset space ~
6200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6210 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6211 Changing the Numbering
6212 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6214 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
6221 \begin_layout Standard
6222 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear in the Table of Contents.
6224 this doesn't remove any of the levels;
6225 that's preset in the document class.
6226 Just as certain classes start with
6241 not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
6251 This is something you can change.
6254 \begin_layout Standard
6257 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6261 \begin_inset Index idx
6266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6268 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6285 \begin_inset space ~
6289 \begin_inset space ~
6294 you will see two counters.
6299 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
6300 numbers a section heading.
6301 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table of contents.
6304 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6305 Short Titles of Headings
6306 \begin_inset Index idx
6311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6313 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6328 \begin_inset Argument 1
6331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6340 name "sec:Short-Titles"
6347 \begin_layout Standard
6348 Some section or chapter titles,
6351 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
6353 if the header of the page is set to show the current section title,
6354 a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
6357 \begin_layout Standard
6359 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6360 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6361 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6362 To specify a short title,
6363 set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6365 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6367 \begin_inset space ~
6373 This will insert a box labeled
6374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6378 \begin_inset space ~
6382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6385 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6386 This also works for captions inside floats.
6387 There can only be one short title per title.
6390 \begin_layout Standard
6391 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6394 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6398 \begin_layout Standard
6399 The following information applies to all section headings:
6402 \begin_layout Itemize
6403 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6406 \begin_layout Itemize
6407 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6410 \begin_layout Itemize
6411 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6414 \begin_layout Itemize
6415 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6418 \begin_layout Subsection
6422 \begin_layout Standard
6424 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6440 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6441 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6442 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below the text they contain.
6443 They also allow nesting,
6453 as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6456 \begin_layout Standard
6457 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments:
6466 when you start a new paragraph.
6468 you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6472 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6475 once you are done typing in that poem,
6476 you have to change back to the
6480 environment yourself.
6483 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6485 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6492 \begin_inset Index idx
6497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6506 \begin_layout Standard
6507 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments,
6508 it's time for the differences.
6517 are identical except for one difference:
6522 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6531 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6534 \begin_layout Standard
6535 Here's an example of the
6549 extending this line out further and further until it wraps.
6550 See – no indentation!
6554 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6556 there's no indentation,
6557 but there is extra space between me and the other paragraph.
6560 \begin_layout Standard
6561 Here's another example,
6569 \begin_layout Quotation
6576 you will see the indentation.
6577 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting the first line,
6582 is the environment for you!
6588 you were quoting other text.
6591 \begin_layout Quotation
6592 Here's a new paragraph.
6593 I could ramble on and on,
6594 like a politician at election time.
6600 \begin_layout Standard
6601 As the examples show,
6606 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6607 They should put quotes in the
6612 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6616 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6621 \begin_inset Index idx
6626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6628 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6643 \begin_inset Index idx
6648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6664 \begin_layout Standard
6669 is a paragraph environment for poetry,
6678 \begin_inset Newline newline
6681 Which I did not rehearse!
6685 It could be much worse.
6686 This line could be long,
6689 so very long that it wraps around.
6690 It looks okay on screen,
6691 but in the printed version,
6692 the extra lines are indented a bit more than the first.
6694 so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6700 \begin_inset Newline newline
6703 And make things look fine
6704 \begin_inset Newline newline
6710 arg "newline-insert newline"
6716 \begin_layout Standard
6722 does not indent both margins.
6723 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6724 To separate the individual lines of a stanza,
6728 arg "newline-insert newline"
6734 \begin_layout Subsection
6736 \begin_inset Index idx
6741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6757 \begin_layout Standard
6759 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds of lists.
6770 labels your list items with bullets or numbers,
6782 lets you provide your own label.
6783 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after describing some general features of all four of them.
6786 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6790 \begin_layout Standard
6791 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments in several ways.
6794 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6803 reset the environment to
6807 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6808 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6809 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting depth,
6813 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6817 If you do this at the top level of a list,
6818 it returns you to the
6825 \begin_layout Standard
6826 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6829 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is nested.
6830 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments,
6831 we suggest you read all of section
6832 \begin_inset space ~
6836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6838 reference "sec:Nesting"
6846 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6848 \begin_inset Index idx
6853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6855 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6879 \begin_layout Standard
6880 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6884 paragraph environment.
6885 It has the following properties:
6888 \begin_layout Itemize
6889 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6893 \begin_layout Itemize
6895 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6898 \begin_layout Itemize
6899 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6903 \begin_layout Itemize
6904 The items can have any length.
6906 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6907 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6914 \begin_layout Itemize
6919 environment inside another
6924 the label changes to a new symbol.
6928 \begin_layout Itemize
6929 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6932 \begin_layout Itemize
6934 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6937 \begin_layout Itemize
6939 \begin_inset space ~
6943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6945 reference "sec:Nesting"
6950 for a full explanation of nesting.
6954 \begin_layout Standard
6956 that explanation was also an example of an
6965 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6968 \begin_layout Standard
6969 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6970 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6973 \begin_layout Itemize
6974 The label for the first level
6978 is a large black dot,
6983 \begin_layout Itemize
6984 The label for the second level is a dash.
6988 \begin_layout Itemize
6989 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6993 \begin_layout Itemize
6994 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6998 \begin_layout Itemize
6999 Back out to the third level.
7003 \begin_layout Itemize
7004 Back to the second level.
7008 \begin_layout Itemize
7009 Back to the outermost level.
7012 \begin_layout Standard
7013 These are the default labels for an
7018 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
7020 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
7023 dialog in the submenu
7028 \begin_inset Index idx
7033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7035 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7049 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
7053 \begin_layout Standard
7054 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
7055 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths in section
7056 \begin_inset space ~
7060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7062 reference "sec:Nesting"
7070 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7072 \begin_inset Index idx
7077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7079 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7094 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7096 name "sec:Enumerate"
7103 \begin_layout Standard
7108 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
7109 It has these properties:
7112 \begin_layout Enumerate
7113 Each item has a numeral as its label.
7117 \begin_layout Enumerate
7118 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
7122 \begin_layout Enumerate
7124 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
7127 \begin_layout Enumerate
7132 environment resets the counter to one.
7135 \begin_layout Enumerate
7149 \begin_layout Enumerate
7150 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
7151 Items can have any length.
7154 \begin_layout Enumerate
7155 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
7158 \begin_layout Enumerate
7159 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
7162 \begin_layout Enumerate
7163 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
7167 \begin_layout Standard
7177 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
7179 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
7180 labels the four different levels in an
7187 \begin_layout Enumerate
7188 The first level of an
7192 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
7196 \begin_layout Enumerate
7197 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
7201 \begin_layout Enumerate
7202 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
7206 \begin_layout Enumerate
7207 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
7210 \begin_layout Enumerate
7212 notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth increases.
7216 \begin_layout Enumerate
7217 Back to the third level
7221 \begin_layout Enumerate
7222 Back to the second level.
7226 \begin_layout Enumerate
7227 Back to the outermost level.
7230 \begin_layout Standard
7231 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
7237 \begin_inset space ~
7241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7243 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7249 Such customization only shows up in the printed version,
7250 not in \SpecialChar LyX
7254 \begin_layout Standard
7255 There is more to nesting
7259 environments than we've stated here.
7260 You should read section
7261 \begin_inset space ~
7265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7267 reference "sec:Nesting"
7272 to learn more about nesting.
7275 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7277 \begin_inset Index idx
7282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7284 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7301 \begin_layout Standard
7302 Unlike the previous two environments,
7307 list has no fixed label.
7311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7318 of the first line as the label.
7322 \begin_layout Description
7324 This is an example of the
7331 \begin_layout Standard
7333 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the rest of the line.
7336 \begin_layout Standard
7338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7345 it is meant that the first usage of the
7349 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an item.
7350 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
7358 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7363 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7364 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7366 \begin_inset space ~
7373 \begin_inset space ~
7377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7379 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
7384 for more information.) Here is an example:
7387 \begin_layout Description
7389 \begin_inset space ~
7393 This one shows how to use a
7396 \begin_inset space ~
7408 \begin_layout Description
7414 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
7415 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text that describes it.
7416 It's not a good idea to use a
7420 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
7421 You're better off using
7433 paragraphs into them.
7436 \begin_layout Description
7442 environments inside one another,
7443 nest them in other types of lists,
7447 \begin_layout Standard
7448 Notice that after the first line,
7450 indents subsequent lines,
7451 offsetting them from the first line.
7454 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7456 \begin_inset Index idx
7461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7463 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7480 \begin_layout Standard
7485 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7486 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7490 \begin_layout Standard
7499 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional features.
7500 Here are its properties:
7503 \begin_layout Labeling
7504 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7506 \begin_inset space ~
7509 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7518 of each line as the item label.
7523 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7524 If you need to use more than one word in an item label,
7525 use a non-breaking space as described above.
7528 \begin_layout Labeling
7529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7530 margins As you can see,
7532 uses different margins for the item label and the body of the item text.
7533 The body of the text has a larger left margin,
7534 which is equal to the default label width plus a little extra space.
7537 \begin_layout Labeling
7538 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7540 \begin_inset space ~
7543 width \SpecialChar LyX
7544 uses the width of the label,
7545 or the default width,
7547 If the label width is larger,
7549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7556 into the first line.
7558 the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left margin of the rest of the item text.
7561 \begin_layout Labeling
7562 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7564 \begin_inset space ~
7567 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all items in a
7571 environment has the same left margin.
7572 \begin_inset Newline newline
7575 To change the default width,
7576 select all items in the list.
7579 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7581 \begin_inset space ~
7586 dialog (toolbar button
7589 arg "layout-paragraph"
7596 \begin_inset space ~
7601 determines the default label width.
7602 You can use the text of your largest label here,
7603 but you can also use the letter
7604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7611 multiple times instead.
7612 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7622 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7625 \begin_inset space ~
7630 every time you alter a label in a
7635 \begin_inset Newline newline
7638 The predefined default width is the length of
7639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7647 \begin_inset space ~
7653 \begin_layout Standard
7658 list the same way as the
7663 When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes it.
7668 environment gives you another way to do this,
7669 using a different overall layout.
7672 \begin_layout Standard
7677 lists inside one another,
7678 nest them in other types of lists,
7680 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7682 \begin_inset space ~
7686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7688 reference "sec:Nesting"
7693 to learn about nesting.
7696 \begin_layout Standard
7697 There is yet another feature of the
7702 As you can see in the examples,
7704 left-justifies the item labels by default.
7705 You can use additional
7709 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7710 justifies the item label.
7715 are documented in section
7716 \begin_inset space ~
7720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7722 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7728 Here are some examples:
7731 \begin_layout Labeling
7732 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7733 Left The default for
7740 \begin_layout Labeling
7741 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7742 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7749 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7752 \begin_layout Labeling
7753 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7754 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7758 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7765 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7768 \begin_layout Subsection
7770 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7772 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7777 \begin_inset Index idx
7782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7784 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7801 \begin_layout Standard
7802 The features described in this section require that the module
7804 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7806 is loaded in the document settings.
7807 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7813 \begin_inset Index idx
7818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7821 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7839 Custom Enumerate Lists
7840 \begin_inset Index idx
7845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7847 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7857 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7874 \begin_layout Standard
7876 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
7878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7881 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7882 There you add the command
7885 \begin_layout Standard
7893 \begin_layout Standard
7905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7906 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7909 \begin_inset space ~
7913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7915 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7929 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7936 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7937 For capital Roman numerals replace
7949 in the command above.
7950 For Arabic numerals use
7958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7965 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7981 \begin_layout Standard
7983 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7992 You can only number 26
7993 \begin_inset space ~
7996 items with Latin letters,
7997 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
8005 \begin_layout Standard
8006 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
8007 replace the 'i' in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi,
8013 \begin_layout Standard
8014 Here is a list with custom numbering:
8017 \begin_layout Enumerate
8018 \begin_inset Argument 1
8021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8047 \begin_layout Enumerate
8048 \begin_inset Argument 1
8051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8074 \begin_layout Enumerate
8079 \begin_layout Enumerate
8080 \begin_inset Argument 1
8083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8107 \begin_layout Enumerate
8108 \begin_inset Argument 1
8111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8137 \begin_layout Standard
8138 For this list these commands were used:
8141 \begin_layout Standard
8152 \begin_inset Newline newline
8160 \begin_inset Newline newline
8168 \begin_inset Newline newline
8178 \begin_layout Standard
8185 makes the label emphasized and
8194 \begin_layout Standard
8195 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8204 When you change the label of a list level,
8205 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
8213 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8215 \begin_inset Index idx
8220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8222 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8232 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8249 \begin_layout Standard
8250 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
8253 \begin_layout Enumerate
8254 \begin_inset Argument 1
8257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8276 \begin_inset Note Note
8279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8280 goes back to default numbering
8288 \begin_layout Enumerate
8292 \begin_layout Standard
8296 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
8300 \begin_layout Standard
8301 To resume an enumeration,
8310 \begin_layout Standard
8311 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8320 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
8321 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8330 \begin_layout Standard
8331 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
8332 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
8333 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
8338 \begin_layout Standard
8344 \begin_layout Standard
8349 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
8353 \begin_layout Enumerate
8357 \begin_layout Enumerate
8361 \begin_layout Standard
8362 Enumeration starting at a given value:
8365 \begin_layout Enumerate
8366 \begin_inset Argument 1
8369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8385 This enumeration starts at 4
8388 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8390 \begin_inset Index idx
8395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8397 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8414 \begin_layout Standard
8415 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
8416 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
8419 \begin_layout Itemize
8423 \begin_layout Itemize
8424 with standard spacing
8427 \begin_layout Standard
8428 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
8429 Add there the command
8433 to get no additional list space like in this example:
8436 \begin_layout Itemize
8437 \begin_inset Argument 1
8440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8459 \begin_layout Itemize
8463 \begin_layout Itemize
8467 \begin_layout Standard
8468 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8474 \begin_inset Index idx
8479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8482 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8497 For more information see its documentation,
8499 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8509 \begin_layout Standard
8510 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
8511 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
8512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8515 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
8518 \begin_layout Enumerate
8519 \begin_inset Argument 1
8522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8544 \begin_layout Enumerate
8545 with negative indentation
8548 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8549 Further Customization
8550 \begin_inset Index idx
8555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8557 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8574 \begin_layout Standard
8575 You can also change the style of description lists.
8579 \begin_layout Standard
8585 \begin_layout Standard
8586 changes the description label font,
8590 \begin_layout Standard
8596 \begin_layout Standard
8597 sets the list style.
8600 \begin_layout Standard
8601 An example where the command
8604 \begin_layout Standard
8613 \begin_layout Standard
8617 \begin_layout Description
8619 \begin_inset space ~
8624 \begin_inset Argument 1
8627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8648 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
8649 therefore ionizing them.
8652 \begin_layout Description
8654 \begin_inset space ~
8658 In computer science,
8659 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
8661 or handles to a resource such as an object,
8663 disk space or other resource.
8666 \begin_layout Standard
8667 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8673 \begin_inset Index idx
8678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8681 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8696 For more information see its documentation
8697 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8707 \begin_layout Subsection
8709 \begin_inset Index idx
8714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8725 \begin_inset space ~
8732 \begin_layout Standard
8733 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8734 has document classes for letters,
8735 we've also created two paragraph environments called
8742 \begin_inset space ~
8748 To use the letter class,
8749 you need to use specific paragraph environments in a specific order,
8750 otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8751 gags on the document.
8760 \begin_inset space ~
8765 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8766 You can even nest them inside other environments,
8767 though you can't nest anything in them.
8770 \begin_layout Standard
8772 you're not limited to using
8779 \begin_inset space ~
8788 \begin_inset space ~
8795 is useful for creating article titles like those used in some European academic papers.
8798 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8802 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8809 \begin_layout Standard
8814 environment formats text in the style of an address,
8815 which is also used for the opening and signature in some countries.
8820 \begin_inset space ~
8825 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address,
8826 which is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8827 Here's an example of each:
8830 \begin_layout Right Address
8832 \begin_inset Newline newline
8836 \begin_inset Newline newline
8840 \begin_inset Newline newline
8847 \begin_layout Standard
8851 \begin_inset space ~
8857 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin,
8858 which \SpecialChar LyX
8859 sets to fit the largest block of text on a single line.
8860 Here's an example of the
8867 \begin_layout Address
8869 \begin_inset Newline newline
8872 Where do I send this
8873 \begin_inset Newline newline
8876 Your post office and country
8879 \begin_layout Standard
8888 \begin_inset space ~
8893 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8898 in either of these environments,
8900 resets the nesting depth and sets the environment to
8915 and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8924 arg "newline-insert newline"
8929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8930 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8932 \begin_inset space ~
8936 \begin_inset space ~
8941 ) to start a new line in an
8948 \begin_inset space ~
8956 \begin_layout Subsection
8960 \begin_layout Standard
8961 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography or list of references.
8963 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8966 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8968 \begin_inset Index idx
8973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8982 \begin_layout Standard
8987 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8989 you could use this environment anywhere,
8990 but you really should only use it at the beginning of the document,
8993 don't bother trying to nest
8997 in anything else or vice versa.
9003 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
9004 The book document classes ignores the
9009 and it's utterly silly to use
9013 in a letter document class.
9016 \begin_layout Standard
9021 environment does several things for you.
9023 it puts the centered label
9024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9032 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical space.
9034 it typesets everything in a smaller font,
9035 just as you'd expect.
9037 it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and the subsequent text.
9039 that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
9041 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are using.
9044 \begin_layout Standard
9045 Starting a new paragraph by entering
9049 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9050 The new paragraph will still be in the
9056 you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you finish entering the abstract of your document.
9059 \begin_layout Standard
9060 \begin_inset Float figure
9067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9069 \begin_inset Graphics
9070 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
9077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9078 \begin_inset Caption Standard
9080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9083 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9104 \begin_layout Standard
9105 We would love to demonstrate the
9110 but since this document is in the
9111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9120 We inserted it therefore as figure
9121 \begin_inset space ~
9125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9127 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9133 If you have never heard of an
9134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9142 you can safely ignore this environment.
9145 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9147 \begin_inset Index idx
9152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9161 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
9168 \begin_layout Standard
9173 environment is used to list references.
9175 you could use this environment anywhere,
9176 but you really should only use it at the end of the document.
9188 \begin_layout Standard
9189 When you first open a
9195 adds a large vertical space,
9196 followed by the heading
9197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9212 depending on the document class.
9213 The heading is in a large boldface font.
9214 Each paragraph of the
9218 environment is a bibliography entry.
9224 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9225 Each new paragraph is still in the
9232 \begin_layout Standard
9234 usually better way to include references in your document by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9236 For more information on that,
9237 and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
9238 's bibliography handling,
9239 have a look at section
9240 \begin_inset space ~
9244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9246 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9254 \begin_layout Subsection
9255 Special Environments
9258 \begin_layout Standard
9260 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
9263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9268 \begin_inset Index idx
9273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9283 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
9290 \begin_layout Standard
9296 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
9298 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
9303 key as a fixed whitespace.
9307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9321 \begin_inset space ~
9326 instead of an end-of-word marker.
9345 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
9347 If you need to insert blank lines,
9348 you will still need to use
9351 arg "newline-insert newline"
9370 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9372 when you finish using the
9378 you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
9385 environment inside of others.
9388 \begin_layout Standard
9389 There are a few quirks with this environment:
9392 \begin_layout Itemize
9396 arg "newline-insert newline"
9399 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
9400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9404 \begin_inset space \space{}
9414 arg "newline-insert newline"
9420 \begin_layout Itemize
9424 arg "newline-insert newline"
9434 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
9440 \begin_layout Itemize
9441 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
9442 You must put at least one
9446 in any line you want blank.
9452 \begin_layout Itemize
9453 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
9457 since that will insert
9462 You get the typewriter double quotes with
9465 arg "self-insert \""
9471 \begin_layout Standard
9475 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9479 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9483 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9487 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9491 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9492 printf("Hello World!
9497 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9501 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9505 \begin_layout Standard
9506 This is just the standard
9507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9517 \begin_layout Standard
9525 such as program source,
9526 shell scripts and so on.
9527 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text as if you used a typewriter.
9528 \begin_inset Index idx
9533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9534 Paragraph environments
9539 For longer parts of programming code,
9540 use the listings inset that is described in the chapter
9542 Program Code Listings
9547 \begin_inset space ~
9555 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9559 \begin_inset Index idx
9564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9573 \begin_layout Standard
9578 environment is similar to the
9583 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a computer console text.
9588 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
9602 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a non-breaking space) and you can have empty lines.
9616 \begin_layout Itemize
9617 have a certain language and a text style
9620 \begin_layout Itemize
9623 foot- and margin notes,
9627 index- and nomenclature entries,
9632 floats and \SpecialChar TeX
9636 \begin_layout Standard
9637 Because of these properties
9641 works like a typewriter.
9645 \begin_layout Verbatim
9650 \begin_layout Verbatim
9654 The following 2 lines are empty:
9657 \begin_layout Verbatim
9661 \begin_layout Verbatim
9665 \begin_layout Verbatim
9667 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
9672 \begin_layout Standard
9677 environment is identical to
9681 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
9682 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
9689 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9694 \begin_layout Section
9695 Nesting Environments
9696 \begin_inset Index idx
9701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9703 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9727 \begin_layout Subsection
9731 \begin_layout Standard
9733 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific properties.
9734 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of another block.
9735 For example you have three main points in an outline,
9736 but point #2 also has two subpoints.
9738 you have a list inside of another list,
9740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9750 \begin_layout Enumerate
9754 \begin_layout Enumerate
9759 \begin_layout Enumerate
9763 \begin_layout Enumerate
9768 \begin_layout Enumerate
9772 \begin_layout Standard
9773 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9774 Nesting an environment is quite simple:
9777 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9779 \begin_inset space ~
9783 \begin_inset space ~
9791 \begin_inset space ~
9795 \begin_inset space ~
9800 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are nested).
9801 Instead of the menu,
9802 you can also use the toolbar buttons
9805 arg "depth-increment"
9811 arg "depth-decrement"
9825 arg "depth-increment"
9831 arg "depth-decrement"
9835 The change will work on the current selection,
9836 if you have made one (allowing you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once),
9837 or the current paragraph.
9840 \begin_layout Standard
9841 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9842 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9843 If it is invalid to do so,
9844 nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9846 if you change the depth of one paragraph,
9847 it affects the depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9850 \begin_layout Standard
9851 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9854 you can nest just about anything inside anything else,
9855 as you're about to find out.
9856 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9859 \begin_layout Subsection
9860 What You Can and Can't Nest
9863 \begin_layout Standard
9864 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you,
9865 we need to tell you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9868 \begin_layout Standard
9869 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated than a simple yes or no.
9870 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9873 \begin_layout Itemize
9874 Completely unnestable
9877 \begin_layout Itemize
9879 you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other things inside them.
9882 \begin_layout Itemize
9884 you can nest them into other environments,
9885 but you can't nest anything into them.
9888 \begin_layout Standard
9889 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior,
9890 and which paragraph environments have them:
9893 \begin_layout Description
9894 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9895 Can't nest into them.
9899 \begin_layout Itemize
9905 \begin_layout Itemize
9911 \begin_layout Itemize
9917 \begin_layout Itemize
9923 \begin_layout Itemize
9930 \begin_layout Description
9932 \begin_inset space ~
9935 Nestable You can nest them.
9936 You can nest other things into them.
9940 \begin_layout Itemize
9946 \begin_layout Itemize
9952 \begin_layout Itemize
9958 \begin_layout Itemize
9964 \begin_layout Itemize
9970 \begin_layout Itemize
9976 \begin_layout Itemize
9982 \begin_layout Itemize
9989 \begin_layout Itemize
9995 \begin_layout Itemize
10002 \begin_layout Description
10003 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
10004 You can't nest anything into them.
10008 \begin_layout Itemize
10014 \begin_layout Itemize
10020 \begin_layout Itemize
10026 \begin_layout Itemize
10032 \begin_layout Itemize
10038 \begin_layout Itemize
10044 \begin_layout Itemize
10050 \begin_layout Itemize
10056 \begin_layout Itemize
10062 \begin_layout Itemize
10068 \begin_layout Itemize
10074 \begin_layout Itemize
10080 \begin_layout Itemize
10086 \begin_layout Itemize
10090 \begin_inset space ~
10096 \begin_layout Itemize
10103 \begin_layout Standard
10104 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10113 Although it is possible,
10115 to nest numbered section headings like
10126 \begin_inset space ~
10130 it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested section headings violate this.
10138 \begin_layout Subsection
10139 Nesting Other Things:
10144 \begin_inset Index idx
10149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10151 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10168 \begin_layout Standard
10169 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments,
10170 but which are affected by nesting anyhow.
10174 \begin_layout Itemize
10178 \begin_layout Itemize
10182 \begin_layout Itemize
10186 \begin_layout Standard
10188 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10197 Figures and tables in
10201 are not affected by this.
10206 Have a look at section
10207 \begin_inset space ~
10211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10213 reference "sec:Floats"
10218 for more information about
10225 \begin_layout Standard
10227 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
10230 or an equation is inline,
10231 it goes wherever the paragraph it is in goes.
10234 \begin_layout Standard
10236 if you have an equation,
10237 figure or table in a
10238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10246 it behaves just like a
10247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10254 paragraph environment.
10255 You can nest it into any environment,
10256 but you obviously can't nest anything into it.
10259 \begin_layout Standard
10260 Here's an example with a table:
10263 \begin_layout Enumerate
10268 \begin_layout Enumerate
10269 This is (a) and it's nested.
10273 \begin_layout Standard
10274 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10280 \begin_layout Standard
10282 \begin_inset Tabular
10283 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10284 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10285 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10286 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10370 \begin_layout Standard
10371 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10378 \begin_layout Enumerate
10380 The table is actually nested inside (a).
10384 \begin_layout Enumerate
10388 \begin_layout Standard
10389 If we hadn't nested the table at all,
10390 the list would look like this:
10393 \begin_layout Enumerate
10398 \begin_layout Enumerate
10399 This is (a) and it's nested.
10403 \begin_layout Standard
10404 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10410 \begin_layout Standard
10412 \begin_inset Tabular
10413 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10414 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10415 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10416 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10500 \begin_layout Standard
10501 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10507 \begin_layout Enumerate
10515 it's not nested at all.
10518 \begin_layout Enumerate
10522 \begin_layout Standard
10523 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested,
10524 but is also the first item of a new list!
10527 \begin_layout Standard
10528 There's another trap you can fall into:
10530 but not going deep enough.
10532 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
10535 \begin_layout Enumerate
10540 \begin_layout Enumerate
10541 This is (a) and it's nested.
10544 \begin_layout Standard
10545 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10551 \begin_layout Standard
10553 \begin_inset Tabular
10554 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10555 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10556 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10557 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10642 \begin_layout Standard
10643 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10649 \begin_layout Enumerate
10651 The table is actually nested inside Item One,
10659 \begin_layout Enumerate
10663 \begin_layout Standard
10665 item (b) turned into the first item of a new list,
10671 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
10673 if you nest tables,
10674 figures or equations,
10675 make sure you go to the right depth!
10678 \begin_layout Subsection
10679 Usage and General Features
10682 \begin_layout Standard
10683 Speaking of levels,
10685 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
10688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10695 is the innermost possible depth.
10696 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
10699 \begin_layout Enumerate
10700 level #1 – outermost
10704 \begin_layout Enumerate
10709 \begin_layout Enumerate
10714 \begin_layout Enumerate
10719 \begin_layout Itemize
10724 \begin_layout Itemize
10733 \begin_layout Standard
10734 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit,
10735 and you can see both of them in the example.
10736 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments,
10737 you can only perform a four-fold nesting with the
10747 if we tried to nest another
10752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10760 we would get errors.
10763 \begin_layout Subsection
10765 \begin_inset Index idx
10770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10772 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10789 \begin_layout Standard
10790 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10791 We have several examples of nested environments.
10793 we explain how we created the example,
10794 so that you can reproduce them.
10797 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10799 The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10802 \begin_layout Labeling
10803 \labelwidthstring MMM
10804 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10813 \begin_layout Labeling
10814 \labelwidthstring MMM
10815 #2-a This is level #2.
10816 We created it by using
10819 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10825 arg "depth-increment"
10832 \begin_layout Labeling
10833 \labelwidthstring MMM
10834 #3-a This is level #3.
10844 arg "depth-increment"
10848 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10852 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10858 arg "depth-increment"
10865 \begin_layout Standard
10872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10882 We did this by entering
10885 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10892 arg "depth-increment"
10896 then changing the paragraph environment to
10901 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph —
10902 it also works for the
10919 \begin_layout Standard
10929 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10935 \begin_layout Labeling
10936 \labelwidthstring MMM
10937 #4-a This is level #4.
10941 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10944 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10950 we can't nest anything inside a
10955 which is why we're still at level #4.
10961 keep nesting things inside
10962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10973 \begin_layout Labeling
10974 \labelwidthstring MMM
10975 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10980 \begin_layout Labeling
10981 \labelwidthstring MMM
10982 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10983 and this is level #6.
10985 you should know how we made these two.
10989 \begin_layout Labeling
10990 \labelwidthstring MMM
10991 #5-b Back to level #5.
10995 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11001 arg "depth-decrement"
11008 \begin_layout Labeling
11009 \labelwidthstring MMM
11013 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11019 arg "depth-decrement"
11023 we're back at level #4.
11027 \begin_layout Labeling
11028 \labelwidthstring MMM
11029 #3-b Back to level #3.
11030 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
11034 \begin_layout Labeling
11035 \labelwidthstring MMM
11036 #2-b Back to level #2.
11040 \begin_layout Labeling
11041 \labelwidthstring MMM
11043 back to the outermost level,
11045 After this sentence,
11050 and change the paragraph environment back to
11057 \begin_layout Standard
11058 We could have also used the
11077 environment in place of the
11082 The example would have worked exactly the same.
11085 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11090 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11091 This is the LyX-Code environment,
11096 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11106 arg "depth-increment"
11111 \begin_inset Newline newline
11115 we will change to the
11123 \begin_layout Enumerate
11132 \begin_layout Enumerate
11133 Notice how the nested
11137 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
11142 but also inherits its font and spacing!
11146 \begin_layout Standard
11147 We ended this example by entering
11153 we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
11157 and reset the nesting depth by using
11160 arg "depth-decrement"
11166 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11179 \begin_inset Argument 1
11182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11185 Levels and other list environments
11193 \begin_layout Enumerate
11199 paragraph environment.
11200 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
11204 \begin_layout Enumerate
11209 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11215 arg "depth-increment"
11220 what happens if we nest an
11224 environment inside of this one?
11225 It will be at level #3,
11226 but what will its label be?
11231 \begin_layout Itemize
11243 even though it's at level #3.
11245 its label is a bullet.
11246 (We got here by using
11249 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11256 arg "depth-increment"
11260 then changing the environment to
11268 \begin_layout Itemize
11273 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11280 arg "depth-increment"
11284 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
11289 \begin_layout Enumerate
11291 to get to level #5.
11294 we also changed the paragraph environment back to
11299 Notice the type of numbering,
11305 because we are in the
11313 environment (that is,
11329 \begin_layout Enumerate
11334 change the paragraph environment,
11335 but decrease the nesting depth?
11336 What type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
11340 \begin_layout Enumerate
11342 as if you couldn't guess by now,
11346 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11349 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
11352 \begin_layout Enumerate
11356 arg "depth-decrement"
11359 to decrease the depth after the next
11362 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11369 \begin_layout Enumerate
11371 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
11376 \begin_layout Enumerate
11378 Even though we've changed levels,
11380 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral as the label.Why?
11383 \begin_layout Enumerate
11385 even though the nesting depth has changed,
11397 that \SpecialChar LyX
11402 reset the counter for the label.
11406 \begin_layout Enumerate
11410 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11416 arg "depth-decrement"
11420 and we're back to level #2.
11422 we not only changed the nesting depth,
11423 but we also moved back into the twofold-nested
11431 \begin_layout Enumerate
11432 The same thing happens if we do another
11435 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11441 arg "depth-decrement"
11444 sequence and return to level #1,
11445 the outermost level.
11448 \begin_layout Standard
11450 we reset the environment to
11456 the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling \SpecialChar LyX
11466 The number of other
11470 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
11476 The same rule applies for the
11484 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11489 \begin_layout Enumerate
11490 We're going to go totally nuts now.
11491 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples,
11492 nor will we go into the same detail with how we did it.
11502 \begin_layout Standard
11511 arg "depth-increment"
11520 level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created the example in parentheses someplace.
11522 the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
11523 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
11524 Either before or after this,
11525 we will put in the level.
11529 \begin_layout Enumerate
11536 level #1) This is the next item in the list.
11540 \begin_layout Verse
11541 Now we will add verse.
11542 \begin_inset Newline newline
11545 It will get much worse.
11546 \begin_inset Newline newline
11557 arg "depth-increment"
11569 \begin_layout Verse
11572 \begin_inset Newline newline
11575 Bippitey boppitey boo!
11576 \begin_inset Newline newline
11582 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11590 \begin_layout Verse
11591 Here comes a table:
11595 \begin_layout Standard
11596 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11602 \begin_layout Standard
11604 \begin_inset Tabular
11605 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
11606 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11607 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11608 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
11613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
11651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11693 \begin_layout Verse
11697 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11709 arg "depth-increment"
11716 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11723 \begin_inset Newline newline
11731 arg "depth-decrement"
11738 \begin_layout Enumerate
11745 level #1) This is another item.
11746 Note that selecting a
11750 resets the nesting depth to level #1,
11751 so we increased the nesting depth 3 times to put the table inside the
11758 \begin_layout Quotation
11759 We're now ending the
11763 list and changing to
11768 We're still at level #1.
11769 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
11770 The next set of paragraphs is a
11771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11778 We will nest both the
11785 \begin_inset space ~
11790 environments inside of this one,
11791 then use another nested
11795 for the letter body.
11799 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11802 to preserve the depth.
11803 Remember that you need to use
11806 arg "newline-insert newline"
11809 to create multiple lines inside the
11816 \begin_inset space ~
11826 \begin_layout Right Address
11828 \begin_inset Newline newline
11833 \begin_inset Newline newline
11839 \begin_layout Address
11841 \begin_inset space ~
11847 \begin_layout Quotation
11848 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11852 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11854 several of our cows have mysteriously exploded,
11855 creating a backlog in our orders for methane.
11856 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order as soon as possible.
11858 we thank you for your patience.
11861 \begin_layout Quotation
11864 now have a special on beef.
11865 If you are interested,
11866 please return the enclosed pricing and order form with your order,
11867 along with payment.
11870 \begin_layout Quotation
11871 We thank you again for your patience.
11874 \begin_layout Address
11876 \begin_inset Newline newline
11883 \begin_layout Quotation
11884 That ends that example!
11887 \begin_layout Standard
11889 nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11890 gives you a lot of power with just a few keystrokes.
11891 We could have easily nested an
11913 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11916 \begin_layout Subsection
11918 \begin_inset Index idx
11923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11925 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11940 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11942 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11949 \begin_layout Standard
11950 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
11951 For example you need two different enumerations:
11954 \begin_layout Enumerate
11959 \begin_layout Enumerate
11964 \begin_layout Enumerate
11968 \begin_layout Standard
11969 \begin_inset Separator plain
11975 \begin_layout Itemize
11981 \begin_layout Standard
11982 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11988 \begin_layout Enumerate
11992 \begin_layout Enumerate
11996 \begin_layout Enumerate
12000 \begin_layout Standard
12001 To split an existing list into two lists,
12002 set the cursor at the end of a list item and use the menu
12004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12005 Separated <Name> Above
12009 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12010 Separated <Name> Below
12013 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
12014 ) and before or behind it the new list.
12015 Inside nested environments,
12016 it is also possible to split the outer environment.
12019 \begin_layout Standard
12020 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
12021 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
12024 \begin_layout Standard
12026 you get an environment separator when you press
12029 arg "paragraph-break"
12036 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
12039 \begin_layout Section
12041 Pagination and Line Breaks
12042 \begin_inset Index idx
12047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12056 \begin_layout Standard
12058 While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors,
12060 offers you more spaces:
12061 spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot be broken at the end of a line.
12062 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are useful.
12065 \begin_layout Subsection
12067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12069 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
12074 \begin_inset Index idx
12079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12081 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12098 \begin_layout Standard
12099 The non-breaking space:
12100 It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
12101 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
12102 ) not to automatically break the line at that point.
12103 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks,
12107 \begin_layout Quote
12108 Further documentation is given in section
12109 \begin_inset Newline newline
12113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12115 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12123 \begin_layout Standard
12125 it would be a good thing to put a non-breaking space between
12126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12140 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12150 A non-breaking space is set with
12152 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12153 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12155 \begin_inset space ~
12163 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
12169 \begin_layout Subsection
12171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12173 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12178 \begin_inset Index idx
12183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12185 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12202 \begin_layout Standard
12203 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
12205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12206 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12210 The length units are listed in Appendix
12211 \begin_inset space ~
12215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12217 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12229 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
12234 \begin_inset Index idx
12239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12241 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12258 \begin_layout Standard
12259 With the introduction of typewriters,
12260 it became conventional in some countries to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters at the ends of sentences.
12261 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
12262 automatically takes care about this.
12264 you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed by a period;
12266 \begin_inset space ~
12270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12272 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
12278 To insert a normal space,
12281 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12282 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12284 \begin_inset space ~
12292 arg "space-insert normal"
12298 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12299 Non-Breaking Thin Space
12300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12302 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
12307 \begin_inset Index idx
12312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12314 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12331 \begin_layout Standard
12333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12336 non-breaking thin space
12337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12340 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
12341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12349 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide,
12351 inside abbreviations:
12354 \begin_layout Quote
12356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12360 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
12363 \begin_layout Standard
12364 or between values and units.
12365 Compare for example this:
12366 \begin_inset Newline newline
12370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12374 \begin_inset Newline newline
12377 10 kg (normal space)
12380 \begin_layout Standard
12381 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
12383 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12384 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12386 \begin_inset space ~
12390 \begin_inset space ~
12398 arg "space-insert thin"
12404 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12408 \begin_layout Standard
12409 You can also insert the following space types:
12412 \begin_layout Description
12414 \begin_inset space ~
12417 space A line with a
12418 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12422 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
12426 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12429 medium space between the arrows.
12432 \begin_layout Description
12434 \begin_inset space ~
12437 space A line with a
12438 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12442 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
12446 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12449 thick space between the arrows.
12452 \begin_layout Description
12454 \begin_inset space ~
12458 \begin_inset space ~
12461 space A line with a
12462 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12466 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
12470 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12473 negative thin space between the arrows.
12476 \begin_layout Description
12478 \begin_inset space ~
12482 \begin_inset space ~
12485 space A line with a
12486 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12490 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
12494 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12497 negative medium space between the arrows.
12500 \begin_layout Description
12502 \begin_inset space ~
12506 \begin_inset space ~
12509 space A line with a
12510 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12514 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
12518 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12521 negative thick space between the arrows.
12524 \begin_layout Description
12526 \begin_inset space ~
12530 \begin_inset space ~
12534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12538 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12542 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
12546 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12550 \begin_inset space ~
12554 \begin_inset space ~
12558 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12561 em) space between the arrows.
12564 \begin_layout Description
12566 \begin_inset space ~
12570 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12574 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12578 \begin_inset space \quad{}
12582 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12586 \begin_inset space ~
12590 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12593 em) space between the arrows.
12596 \begin_layout Description
12598 \begin_inset space ~
12602 \begin_inset space ~
12606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12610 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12614 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
12618 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12622 \begin_inset space ~
12626 \begin_inset space ~
12630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12633 em) space between the arrows.
12636 \begin_layout Description
12638 \begin_inset space ~
12642 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12646 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
12651 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12658 cm space between the arrows.
12661 \begin_layout Standard
12663 \begin_inset space ~
12667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12669 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
12674 lists the different space sizes.
12677 \begin_layout Standard
12678 \begin_inset Float table
12685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12686 \begin_inset Caption Standard
12688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12691 name "tab:Width-of-the"
12695 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
12703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12705 \begin_inset Tabular
12706 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
12707 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12708 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12709 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12711 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12722 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12735 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12744 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12759 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12763 Non-breaking Normal
12768 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12783 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12792 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12801 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12805 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12815 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12824 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12839 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12848 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12853 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12863 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12872 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12887 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12896 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12901 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12911 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12920 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12925 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12935 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12948 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12957 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12971 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12984 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12999 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13004 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13012 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13038 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13040 \begin_inset Index idx
13045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13047 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13064 \begin_layout Standard
13065 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
13066 feature for adding extra space in a uniform fashion.
13067 An Horizontal Fill is actually a variable length space,
13068 whose length always equals the remaining space between the left and right margins.
13069 If there is more than one Horizontal Fill on a line,
13070 they divide the available space equally between themselves.
13073 \begin_layout Standard
13074 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
13077 \begin_layout Quote
13079 This is on the left side
13080 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13083 This is on the right
13086 \begin_layout Quote
13089 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13093 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13099 \begin_layout Quote
13102 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13106 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13110 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13116 \begin_layout Standard
13117 That was an example in the
13123 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13127 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13131 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13134 is one in a standard paragraph.
13135 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text,
13140 sitting in-between the two arrows.
13143 \begin_layout Standard
13144 Horizontal Fills can be made visible when you choose one of the
13147 \begin_inset space ~
13152 s in the space dialog:
13153 The following patterns are available:
13156 \begin_layout Standard
13159 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
13163 \begin_inset space ~
13169 \begin_layout Standard
13172 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
13176 \begin_inset space ~
13182 \begin_layout Standard
13185 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
13189 \begin_inset space ~
13195 \begin_layout Standard
13198 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
13202 \begin_inset space ~
13208 \begin_layout Standard
13209 Down brace (= opened downwards):
13211 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
13215 \begin_inset space ~
13221 \begin_layout Standard
13222 Up brace (= opened upwards):
13224 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
13228 \begin_inset space ~
13234 \begin_layout Standard
13235 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13244 If an Horizontal Fill is at the beginning of a line,
13249 in the first line in a paragraph,
13252 This prevents Horizontal Fills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
13253 If you need space in this case anyway,
13258 option in the space dialog.
13266 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13270 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
13275 \begin_inset Index idx
13280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13282 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13299 \begin_layout Standard
13300 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
13302 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
13305 \begin_layout Standard
13306 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
13309 What is correct English?:
13310 \begin_inset Newline newline
13314 \begin_inset Newline newline
13318 \begin_inset space ~
13321 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
13322 \begin_inset Newline newline
13326 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13337 \begin_inset Newline newline
13341 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13352 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
13358 \begin_layout Standard
13360 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
13361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13365 \begin_inset space ~
13369 \begin_inset space ~
13373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13378 you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
13380 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13381 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13385 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two lines and insert
13386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13390 \begin_inset space ~
13394 \begin_inset space ~
13398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13401 into the phantom inset (note the space after
13402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13410 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
13411 That is why it is named
13412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13420 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
13421 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding dimension.
13424 \begin_layout Subsection
13426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13428 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
13433 \begin_inset Index idx
13438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13440 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13457 \begin_layout Standard
13458 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph,
13461 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13462 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13464 \begin_inset space ~
13470 There you find the following sizes:
13473 \begin_layout Standard
13487 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
13488 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
13493 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
13495 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13496 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
13498 \begin_inset space ~
13504 \begin_inset Index idx
13509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13511 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13525 for the paragraph separation.
13526 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
13537 \begin_layout Standard
13546 equal to the height,
13547 or half the height,
13548 of a line in the current font size including line spacing.
13551 \begin_layout Standard
13557 \begin_inset Index idx
13562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13564 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13578 is a variable space,
13579 set so that the space is maximal within one page.
13581 you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
13586 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second one at the bottom,
13587 because the space between them is then maximal.
13597 they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
13601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13606 s are described in section
13607 \begin_inset space ~
13611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13613 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
13623 If there are several
13628 they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
13629 You can therefore use
13633 s to center text on a page,
13634 or even place text 2/3 down a page.
13637 \begin_layout Standard
13642 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
13643 \begin_inset space ~
13647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13649 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
13657 \begin_layout Standard
13658 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13669 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of a page,
13670 the space is only added if you have also checked the option
13682 \begin_layout Subsection
13683 Paragraph Alignment
13684 \begin_inset Index idx
13689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13691 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13708 \begin_layout Standard
13709 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
13711 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13714 dialog (toolbar button
13717 arg "layout-paragraph"
13721 There are five possibilities:
13724 \begin_layout Itemize
13732 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
13738 \begin_layout Itemize
13746 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
13752 \begin_layout Itemize
13760 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
13766 \begin_layout Itemize
13774 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
13780 \begin_layout Itemize
13788 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
13794 \begin_layout Standard
13795 The default in most cases is justified alignment,
13796 in which the inter-word spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between the left and right margins.
13797 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory,
13798 and look like this:
13801 \begin_layout Standard
13803 This paragraph is right aligned,
13806 \begin_layout Standard
13808 this one is centered,
13811 \begin_layout Standard
13813 this one is left aligned.
13816 \begin_layout Subsection
13818 \begin_inset Index idx
13823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13825 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13840 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13842 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
13849 \begin_layout Standard
13850 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
13851 does the page breaks in your document,
13852 you can force a page break where you want one.
13853 Normally this will not be necessary,
13854 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
13855 is good at page breaking.
13856 Only if you use a lot of
13862 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
13865 \begin_layout Standard
13866 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished and you have checked in the preview to see if you
13870 have to change the page breaking.
13873 \begin_layout Standard
13874 There are two types of page breaks:
13875 One that ends the page without any special action.
13876 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
13878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13879 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13881 \begin_inset space ~
13888 that is inserted via the menu
13890 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13891 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13893 \begin_inset space ~
13899 ends a page but stretches the content of the page,
13900 so that it fills out the complete page.
13901 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page on which only the last few lines are absent.
13904 \begin_layout Standard
13905 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears at the top of a page.
13908 the wrong way to do it.
13910 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables appear at the top of a page (or the bottom,
13911 or on their own page) without having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
13913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13915 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
13920 to learn more about
13927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13931 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
13936 \begin_inset Index idx
13941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13943 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13960 \begin_layout Standard
13961 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed directly on the next page,
13962 you can also clear pages while breaking them.
13963 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything,
13964 including unprocessed floats,
13965 from the earlier part of the document are placed after it,
13966 if necessary by adding pages.
13969 \begin_layout Standard
13970 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
13972 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13973 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13975 \begin_inset space ~
13981 When you have a two-sided document like a book,
13982 you can use the menu
13984 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13985 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13987 \begin_inset space ~
13991 \begin_inset space ~
13996 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand page (odd-numbered),
13997 if necessary by adding a page.
14000 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14001 Suppressing Page Breaks
14002 \begin_inset Index idx
14007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14009 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14026 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
14033 \begin_layout Standard
14034 To discourage page break at a certain point you can use
14036 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14037 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14041 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
14044 \begin_layout Subsection
14046 \begin_inset Index idx
14051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14060 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
14067 \begin_layout Standard
14068 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks:
14069 one simply breaks the line.
14070 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
14072 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14073 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14075 \begin_inset space ~
14079 \begin_inset space ~
14087 arg "newline-insert newline"
14091 Another type that is inserted via the menu
14093 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14094 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14096 \begin_inset space ~
14100 \begin_inset space ~
14108 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
14111 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between the page margins.
14112 This is useful to avoid
14113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14120 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
14123 \begin_layout Standard
14124 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
14126 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
14127 is very good at line breaking.
14130 a number of situations where it is necessary to set a line break actively,
14132 in a poem or for an address (see sections
14133 \begin_inset space ~
14137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14139 reference "sec:Quote"
14146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14148 reference "sec:Verse"
14154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14156 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
14164 \begin_layout Subsection
14166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14168 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
14173 \begin_inset Index idx
14178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14187 \begin_layout Standard
14189 \begin_inset CommandInset line
14200 \begin_layout Standard
14204 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14205 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14207 \begin_inset space ~
14212 you can insert horizontal lines.
14213 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline of the current text line or the paragraph.
14214 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
14217 \begin_layout Standard
14219 \begin_inset CommandInset line
14230 \begin_layout Section
14231 Characters and Symbols
14234 \begin_layout Standard
14235 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
14236 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter,
14238 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
14240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14246 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
14251 for information on how this is done.
14254 \begin_layout Standard
14255 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard,
14260 dialog via the menu
14262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14263 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
14269 \begin_layout Standard
14270 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14279 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
14281 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
14289 \begin_layout Section
14290 Fonts and Text Styles
14291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14293 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
14300 \begin_layout Subsection
14302 \begin_inset Index idx
14307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14309 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14326 \begin_layout Standard
14327 There are two types of fonts:
14330 \begin_layout Description
14332 \begin_inset space ~
14336 \begin_inset Index idx
14341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14343 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14357 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
14358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14362 characters) in the font.
14363 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are well suited for scaling to any requested size.
14364 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
14365 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
14366 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
14367 \begin_inset Newline newline
14370 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
14371 But to achieve a better quality,
14372 many fonts define several font sizes.
14373 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font sizes than at small ones.
14374 \begin_inset Newline newline
14390 \begin_inset space ~
14398 \begin_layout Description
14400 \begin_inset space ~
14404 \begin_inset Index idx
14409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14411 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14426 are defined by bitmap graphics from the start;
14427 so they will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
14429 they don't scale well,
14430 because in order to scale a glyph,
14431 each pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
14432 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an image manipulation program.
14433 In order to mitigate this effect,
14434 bitmap fonts are typically provided in several fixed sizes typically from around 8
14435 \begin_inset space ~
14438 pixels high up to 34
14439 \begin_inset space ~
14442 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
14443 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary to display each glyph;
14444 so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than scalable fonts.
14445 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have to be scaled by doubling pixels,
14447 \begin_inset Newline newline
14450 Bitmap fonts are named
14453 \begin_inset space ~
14458 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
14461 \begin_layout Standard
14462 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are designed for,
14463 while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
14464 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
14465 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs use scalable fonts.
14468 \begin_layout Standard
14469 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document,
14470 look at its document properties.
14473 \begin_layout Standard
14474 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards specifying text styles rather than specifying a particular font.
14476 instead of changing to an italicized version of the current font,
14477 to emphasize text you use an
14478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14486 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
14488 In \SpecialChar LyX
14490 you do things based on contexts,
14491 rather than focusing on typesetting details.
14494 \begin_layout Subsection
14497 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14499 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14506 \begin_layout Standard
14509 used its own fonts.
14511 you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your operating system,
14512 but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
14514 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
14515 needs some extra information about the fonts,
14516 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
14517 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared to a word processor.
14518 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts are generally of very good quality,
14519 and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
14520 files are very portable across different machines.
14522 the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
14523 has increased a lot in the meantime;
14524 so you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
14526 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface (see section
14527 \begin_inset space ~
14531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14533 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
14539 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
14540 code in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
14543 \begin_layout Standard
14544 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
14545 engines that are also able directly to access fonts that are installed for your operating system,
14546 namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14547 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14549 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
14552 you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font that is installed on your system.
14553 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
14556 \begin_layout Standard
14557 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14567 some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
14569 or other font deficiencies;
14570 so you might have to experiment.
14578 \begin_layout Subsection
14579 Document Font and Font size
14580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14582 name "subsec:Document-Font"
14587 \begin_inset Index idx
14592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14594 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14609 \begin_inset Index idx
14614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14616 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14633 \begin_layout Standard
14634 You can set the document fonts in the
14636 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14640 \begin_inset Index idx
14645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14647 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14666 section of the dialog,
14667 you can specify which font should be used for the three different font shapes —
14672 \begin_inset space ~
14682 and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors for (some) sans
14683 \begin_inset space ~
14686 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
14689 \begin_layout Standard
14695 you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
14696 This requires that you use
14709 as the output format,
14711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14715 \begin_inset space \space{}
14718 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14719 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14720 installed (see section
14721 \begin_inset space ~
14725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14727 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14733 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
14735 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
14736 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
14738 \begin_inset space ~
14743 since \SpecialChar LyX
14744 cannot determine the family.
14745 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts,
14746 due to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
14749 cannot determine this in advance,
14750 so you might need to experiment.
14753 \begin_layout Standard
14754 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
14755 fonts (which is the default),
14756 the possible options for the font include
14760 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
14767 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
14768 With LyX's automatic font encoding,
14770 depending on the document language,
14771 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
14773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14779 \begin_inset space ~
14785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14792 ) or a look-alike of this font:
14794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14811 European Computer Modern
14814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14823 some classes set different default fonts.
14826 \begin_layout Standard
14832 it looks pixelated in PDF output,
14833 especially when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
14837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14838 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
14841 \begin_inset space ~
14846 version 6 or later,
14847 because this program includes a special bitmap font renderer.
14852 To get rid of pixelated fonts,
14853 you have to use a vector font.
14854 Depending on how your document should look,
14858 \begin_layout Itemize
14862 \begin_inset space ~
14868 which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
14880 \begin_inset space ~
14885 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14886 community in order to replace
14890 as the default font.
14891 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
14892 Except for some details,
14893 where the appearance was improved,
14897 \begin_inset space ~
14910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14911 One difference is improved kerning.
14919 \begin_layout Itemize
14920 If you do not like the look of
14929 you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided,
14931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14935 \begin_inset space ~
14941 \begin_inset space ~
14951 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
14952 \begin_inset space ~
14955 serif and typewriter fonts,
14959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14960 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
14961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14968 \begin_inset space ~
14977 for sans serif text),
14978 or different shapes of the same font,
14980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14984 \begin_inset space \space{}
14992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14996 \begin_inset space \space{}
15002 \begin_inset space ~
15010 \begin_inset space ~
15020 but you can also select your own.
15021 \begin_inset Newline newline
15024 The differences between roman,
15028 \begin_inset space ~
15037 fonts are explained in section
15038 \begin_inset space ~
15042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15044 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15050 \begin_inset Newline newline
15056 \begin_inset space ~
15061 was originally designed for newspapers.
15062 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit into the small newspaper columns.
15066 \begin_inset space ~
15071 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
15074 \begin_layout Standard
15075 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
15091 Some classes provide additional sizes.
15096 depends on the class you are using.
15097 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
15100 \begin_layout Standard
15101 Note that the font size is the
15106 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
15107 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used in footnotes,
15109 and subscripts) by this value.
15110 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
15113 \begin_inset space ~
15119 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
15120 \begin_inset space ~
15124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15126 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15134 \begin_layout Standard
15138 \begin_inset space ~
15143 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should be roman,
15145 \begin_inset space ~
15148 serif or typewriter.
15153 selection uses what is preset by the class,
15154 the other selections override this.
15165 but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
15168 \begin_layout Standard
15173 LaTeX font encoding
15175 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15181 \begin_inset Index idx
15186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15189 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15205 you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
15206 Unless you have specific reasons,
15214 \begin_layout Standard
15218 Use Old Style Figures
15222 Use True Small Caps
15225 These are extra features some fonts provide.
15228 Use Old Style Figures
15231 old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) are used.
15232 Old style figures are the numerals (0
15233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15240 9) with ascenders and descenders,
15241 which makes them fit nicely with lowercase letters.
15244 Use True Small Caps
15246 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made of scaled capitals.
15247 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets;
15248 they generally look better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
15251 \begin_layout Standard
15254 you can add additional (comma-separated) options provided by the font package (or the
15259 if you use non-TeX fonts),
15265 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
15269 \begin_layout Standard
15274 allows users of the languages Chinese,
15276 Korean (CJK) to specify a font to display the script characters.
15280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15281 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15287 \begin_inset Index idx
15292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15295 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15309 So this has no effect for the document language
15325 \begin_layout Standard
15328 Enable micro-typographic extensions
15330 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15336 \begin_inset Index idx
15341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15344 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15362 \begin_layout Standard
15365 Disallow line breaks after dashes
15367 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
15371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15372 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
15374 if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15380 instead of ligatures (--,
15382 \begin_inset space ~
15386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15388 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
15399 \begin_layout Standard
15400 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
15404 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15413 When you choose a new font or font size,
15419 change the screen font!
15420 You will only see a difference in the printed output;
15421 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
15423 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
15425 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
15430 \begin_inset space ~
15434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15436 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
15449 \begin_layout Subsection
15453 \begin_layout Standard
15454 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
15455 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document font.
15456 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
15457 fonts for your document,
15458 you can explicitly choose a math font in the dialog
15460 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15464 \begin_inset Index idx
15469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15471 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15486 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
15487 automatically selects a math font.
15488 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
15489 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
15490 's default font family
15491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15497 \begin_inset space ~
15503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15508 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the document font is available.
15511 \begin_layout Standard
15512 Note that the math font will not be used for
15516 (which is inserted with the shortcut
15522 or by the insertion of the command
15529 Also note that some math fonts are sans
15530 \begin_inset space ~
15534 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs while the math characters do not.
15536 \begin_inset space ~
15539 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
15542 \begin_inset space ~
15550 \begin_inset space ~
15555 in the document font settings.
15558 \begin_layout Standard
15559 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
15560 fonts for the document,
15561 you can only choose for math to use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
15562 font (in most cases
15563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15569 \begin_inset space ~
15575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15578 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
15579 variant of the document's class default font (in most cases
15580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15586 \begin_inset space ~
15592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15598 \begin_layout Subsection
15599 Using Different Text Styles
15600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15602 name "subsec:charstyles"
15607 \begin_inset Index idx
15612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15619 \begin_inset Index idx
15624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15633 \begin_layout Standard
15634 As we've already seen,
15636 automatically changes the style for certain paragraph environments.
15638 we will explain how the style of selected text passages can by changed.
15639 This is where we meet the concept of
15646 \begin_layout Standard
15649 supports two text styles,
15665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15669 available with all document classes.
15671 some document classes and modules provide
15675 for specific purposes.
15676 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
15679 \begin_layout Standard
15682 allow us just a few words of what we mean by
15691 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
15696 if you wanted to emphasize a word,
15697 you selected it and chose e.
15698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15719 encourage the use of
15731 instead (although formal markup is still possible;
15733 \begin_inset space ~
15737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15739 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15745 Rather than fiddling with
15750 they encourage the use of
15755 who are defined with regard to their function (e.
15756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15761 \begin_inset Quotes els
15765 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15770 \begin_inset Quotes els
15774 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15778 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
15780 using functional categories keeps you thinking about why you are actually marking up,
15781 if your markup is consistent and systematic,
15782 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
15783 On a more practical level,
15784 it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
15785 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names in
15790 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
15791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15797 you would have to change any single occurrence.
15798 With a semantic markup (such as
15804 you'd just need to change the definition of
15809 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15812 semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions of a document,
15813 using different markup semantics.
15816 \begin_layout Standard
15818 we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided by \SpecialChar LyX
15822 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15823 Builtin Text Styles
15824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15826 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15833 \begin_layout Standard
15834 The two builtin text styles can be activated via the
15843 \begin_layout Standard
15849 do one of the following:
15852 \begin_layout Itemize
15853 click on the toolbar button
15862 \begin_layout Itemize
15863 use the key binding
15872 \begin_layout Itemize
15880 arg "dialog-show character"
15886 arg "dialog-show character"
15896 \begin_layout Standard
15897 This command is a toggle.
15903 style is already active,
15904 they deactivate it.
15907 \begin_layout Standard
15908 One typically uses the
15912 style for proper names.
15915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15922 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
15924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15930 \begin_layout Standard
15936 is producing text in
15941 but the definition can be changed.
15944 \begin_layout Standard
15945 A more widely used text style is the
15950 You can activate (or deactivate —
15951 it's also a toggle) the
15958 \begin_layout Itemize
15959 clicking on the toolbar button
15968 \begin_layout Itemize
15969 using the keybindings
15978 \begin_layout Itemize
15986 arg "dialog-show character"
15992 arg "dialog-show character"
16002 \begin_layout Standard
16007 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
16008 packages use a different font,
16009 and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16013 \begin_layout Standard
16014 We've been using the
16018 style all over the place in this document.
16019 Here's one more example:
16022 \begin_layout Quotation
16025 Do not overuse text styles!
16028 \begin_layout Standard
16029 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
16030 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
16031 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other,
16032 we should also avoid the common tendency to overuse text styles.
16035 \begin_layout Standard
16036 In contrast to the custom text styles,
16037 the builtin styles are represented only as font changes and integrated in the
16042 You can therefore always reset to the default font using the key binding
16053 arg "dialog-show character"
16061 arg "dialog-show character"
16067 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16071 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
16078 \begin_layout Standard
16079 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class,
16080 a module (see section
16081 \begin_inset space ~
16085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16087 reference "subsec:Modules"
16096 or local layout settings (see section
16097 \begin_inset space ~
16101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16103 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
16109 As the two builtin styles,
16114 markup for specific functions.
16121 module that provides,
16122 among other things,
16123 some custom text styles to markup linguistic levels:
16135 \begin_inset Quotes els
16139 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16145 \begin_layout Standard
16146 These styles can be found,
16150 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16156 \begin_layout Standard
16157 For the purpose of demonstration,
16158 we have loaded in this document the optional module
16162 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
16163 By example of the emphasized style,
16164 we can see the differences in look and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same):
16169 appears as normal font change,
16170 the custom text style
16171 \begin_inset Flex Emph
16174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16180 appears as an inset,
16181 with a label below that identifies its semantics.
16182 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
16184 the three others from the module we have loaded are:
16186 \begin_inset Flex Code
16189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16197 \begin_inset Flex Strong
16200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16208 \begin_inset Flex Noun
16211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16218 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate on screen their formal appearance.
16221 \begin_layout Subsection
16222 Tweaking Text with the
16227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16229 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16234 \begin_inset Index idx
16239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16248 \begin_layout Standard
16249 There are always occasions when you will need to do some formal fine-tuning;
16250 so \SpecialChar LyX
16251 gives you a way to customize the properties of text passages.
16253 an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
16255 writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts from ordinary dialog.
16258 \begin_layout Standard
16259 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module for this purpose (which is,
16261 generally the better way of handling such issues),
16262 you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
16267 comes in as a last resort.
16270 \begin_layout Standard
16271 Before we document how to tweak the text properties,
16272 we want to issue a warning yet again:
16273 Don't overuse that!
16275 \begin_inset Newline newline
16278 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
16281 \begin_layout Standard
16282 To tweak text properties,
16286 arg "dialog-show character"
16289 dialog or press the toolbar button
16292 arg "dialog-show character"
16296 There are several combo boxes in this dialog,
16297 each corresponding to a different text property that you can choose.
16298 You can choose an option for one of these properties,
16302 \begin_inset space ~
16308 which keeps the current state of that property.
16313 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
16314 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph environments all at once.
16317 \begin_layout Standard
16323 and their options (in addition to
16326 \begin_inset space ~
16338 \begin_layout Labeling
16339 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16353 The possible options are:
16357 \begin_layout Labeling
16358 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16363 This is the Roman font family.
16364 Normally a serif font.
16365 It's also the default family.
16375 \begin_layout Labeling
16376 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16380 \begin_inset space ~
16387 This is the Sans Serif font family.
16399 \begin_layout Labeling
16400 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16407 This is the Typewriter font family.
16413 arg "font-typewriter"
16421 \begin_layout Standard
16422 The general differences of these families are:
16425 \begin_layout Itemize
16430 fonts use characters with serifs.
16431 These are the small
16432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16439 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16440 The following example shows the difference:
16441 \begin_inset Newline newline
16445 \begin_inset Newline newline
16450 text without serifs
16453 \begin_inset Newline newline
16456 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16457 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16464 \begin_layout Itemize
16469 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16470 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16471 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16474 \begin_layout Itemize
16480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16488 which means every character has the same width;
16490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16507 \begin_inset Newline newline
16511 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16525 \begin_inset Note Note
16528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16529 For more on phantoms see section
16530 \begin_inset space ~
16534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16536 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16547 \begin_inset Newline newline
16554 \begin_layout Labeling
16555 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16560 This corresponds to the print weight.
16565 \begin_layout Labeling
16566 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16571 This is the Medium font series.
16572 It's also the default series.
16575 \begin_layout Labeling
16576 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16583 This is the Bold font series.
16596 \begin_layout Labeling
16597 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16602 As the name implies.
16607 \begin_layout Labeling
16608 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16613 This is the Upright font shape.
16614 It's also the default shape.
16617 \begin_layout Labeling
16618 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16629 is the Italic font shape
16635 \begin_layout Labeling
16636 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16643 This is the Slanted font shape
16645 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
16647 this is different from italic).
16650 \begin_layout Labeling
16651 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16655 \begin_inset space ~
16662 This is the Small caps font shape
16669 \begin_layout Labeling
16670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16675 Alters the size of the font.
16676 You won't find numerical values here;
16677 all possible sizes are actually proportional to the document font size.
16679 you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
16681 but a general description of what you want to do.
16686 \begin_layout Labeling
16687 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16708 arg "font-size tiny"
16714 \begin_layout Labeling
16715 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16736 arg "font-size scriptsize"
16742 \begin_layout Labeling
16743 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16764 arg "font-size footnotesize"
16770 \begin_layout Labeling
16771 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16792 arg "font-size small"
16798 \begin_layout Labeling
16799 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16813 It's also the default size.
16817 arg "font-size normal"
16823 \begin_layout Labeling
16824 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16845 arg "font-size large"
16851 \begin_layout Labeling
16852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16873 arg "font-size larger"
16879 \begin_layout Labeling
16880 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16901 arg "font-size largest"
16907 \begin_layout Labeling
16908 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16929 arg "font-size huge"
16935 \begin_layout Labeling
16936 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16957 arg "font-size giant"
16963 \begin_layout Labeling
16964 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16969 This increases the size by one step (for instance,
16971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16990 arg "font-size increase"
16996 \begin_layout Labeling
16997 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17002 This decreases the size by one step (for instance,
17004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17023 arg "font-size decrease"
17029 \begin_layout Standard
17035 don't go crazy with this feature.
17036 You should almost never need to change the font size.
17038 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments —
17040 This is here for fine-tuning only!
17044 \begin_layout Standard
17045 Another combo box allows to tweak
17052 \begin_layout Labeling
17053 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17058 Alters the text color.
17059 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
17065 which means that the document default color set in
17067 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17068 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17074 \begin_inset space ~
17174 \begin_inset Index idx
17179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17181 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17198 \begin_layout Labeling
17199 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17204 Here you can have text passages being underlined.
17205 Avoid using underlining if you can!
17206 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
17207 when you could not change fonts.
17208 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
17209 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
17210 because some people
17214 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
17219 \begin_layout Labeling
17220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17225 Don't use underlining.
17228 \begin_layout Labeling
17229 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17236 This is text with Single underlining on.
17242 arg "font-underline"
17248 \begin_inset Newline newline
17254 \begin_layout Labeling
17255 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17262 This is text with Double underlining on.
17268 arg "font-underunderline"
17274 \begin_layout Labeling
17275 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17282 This is text with Wavy underlining on.
17288 arg "font-underwave"
17292 \begin_inset Newline newline
17295 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
17296 Keep antinausea pills handy.
17300 \begin_layout Labeling
17301 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17306 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
17310 \begin_layout Labeling
17311 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17316 Don't use strikethrough.
17319 \begin_layout Labeling
17320 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17327 This is text with Single strikethrough on.
17333 arg "font-strikeout"
17337 \begin_inset Newline newline
17340 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been changed in the meantime.
17343 \begin_layout Labeling
17344 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17348 \begin_inset space ~
17355 This is text with /-strikethrough on.
17358 \begin_inset Newline newline
17361 This is used to make text hardly readable.
17365 \begin_layout Standard
17366 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
17369 \begin_layout Labeling
17370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17375 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
17376 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
17377 workarea in blue to indicate the change.
17378 \begin_inset Newline newline
17381 If you have for example,
17382 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
17384 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
17385 When using the spell checking (see section
17386 \begin_inset space ~
17390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17392 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
17397 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
17398 \begin_inset Newline newline
17401 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
17404 Exclude from Spellchecking
17407 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
17410 \begin_layout Standard
17411 In addition to all the formal markup described above,
17412 the dialog also provides you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
17413 \begin_inset space ~
17417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17419 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
17431 \begin_layout Itemize
17439 This is text with emphasize on
17444 \begin_layout Itemize
17452 This is text with Noun on.
17455 \begin_layout Standard
17456 So you have a huge number of combinations to select from.
17457 Once you have applied a text property via the
17460 arg "dialog-show character"
17466 arg "dialog-show character"
17470 the settings are temporarily saved.
17471 You can activate the last applied properties by using the toolbar button
17474 arg "textstyle-apply"
17478 The button lets you apply those even when the dialog isn't visible.
17479 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again,
17480 a press on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
17481 20) most recently applied settings,
17482 from which you can select one.
17485 \begin_layout Standard
17486 To completely reset the text properties of a selection to the default,
17497 from the menu of the toolbar button
17500 arg "textstyle-apply"
17507 \begin_layout Standard
17508 We conclude this section with the same warning once again:
17509 Do not overuse the fonts!
17511 more often than not,
17512 a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17515 \begin_layout Section
17516 Printing and Previewing
17519 \begin_layout Subsection
17523 \begin_layout Standard
17524 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation using \SpecialChar LyX
17526 you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17527 Before we tell you that,
17528 we want to give you a quick explanation of what goes on behind-the-scenes.
17529 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17531 Additional Features
17536 \begin_layout Standard
17538 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17541 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17542 typesetting system,
17543 but to prevent confusion,
17544 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17547 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17550 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17551 to turn your writing into printable output.
17552 This happens in two stages:
17555 \begin_layout Enumerate
17558 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17560 generating a file with the extension,
17562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17576 \begin_layout Enumerate
17579 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17580 to use the commands in the
17584 file to produce printable output.
17587 \begin_layout Subsection
17588 Output file formats
17589 \begin_inset Index idx
17594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17603 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17612 \begin_inset Index idx
17617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17619 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17636 \begin_layout Standard
17637 This file type has the extension
17638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17650 It contains your document as plain text in UTF-8 encoding.
17653 \begin_layout Standard
17654 You can export your document to plain text with the menu
17656 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17657 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17659 \begin_inset space ~
17666 this will not export any externally generated material such as a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17667 bibliography (section
17668 \begin_inset space ~
17672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17674 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17680 If your document includes such material,
17683 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17684 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17686 \begin_inset space ~
17690 \begin_inset space ~
17694 \begin_inset space ~
17702 \begin_inset space ~
17706 \begin_inset space ~
17712 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to plain text.
17715 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17718 \begin_inset Index idx
17723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17725 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17743 \begin_layout Standard
17744 This file type has the extension
17745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17756 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17757 program to process your document.
17758 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17760 you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17761 -Errors or to process it manually with console commands.
17762 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17763 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17764 's temporary directory whenever you view or export your document.
17767 \begin_layout Standard
17768 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17769 -file using the menu
17771 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17772 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17776 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17777 export variants are explained in section
17778 \begin_inset space ~
17782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17784 reference "subsec:Export"
17792 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17794 \begin_inset Index idx
17799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17801 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17818 \begin_layout Standard
17819 This file type has the extension
17820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17841 because it is completely portable;
17842 you can move them from one machine to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17843 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17847 \begin_layout Standard
17848 DVI files do not contain images,
17849 they only link to them.
17850 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17851 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make them visible when you scroll the DVI,
17852 this can slow down your computer when you view the DVI.
17853 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17856 \begin_layout Standard
17857 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17859 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17860 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17865 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17866 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17868 \begin_inset space ~
17874 The latter option uses the program
17876 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17882 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17885 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
17886 \begin_inset space ~
17890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17892 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17898 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17899 is still a work in progress,
17900 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
17904 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17906 \begin_inset Index idx
17911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17913 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17930 \begin_layout Standard
17931 This file type has the extension
17932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17944 PostScript was developed by the company
17948 as a printer language.
17949 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the file.
17950 PostScript can be seen as a
17951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17954 programming language
17955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17959 you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17964 If you are interested in learning more about this,
17965 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17971 \begin_inset Index idx
17976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17979 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17998 As a result of this,
17999 the files are often bigger than PDFs.
18002 \begin_layout Standard
18003 PostScript can only contain images in the format
18004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18007 Encapsulated PostScript
18008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18025 As \SpecialChar LyX
18026 allows you to use any known image format in your document,
18027 it has to convert them in the background to EPS.
18031 \begin_inset space ~
18034 images in your document,
18037 \begin_inset space ~
18040 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
18041 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
18043 So if you plan to use PostScript,
18044 you can insert your images directly as EPS to avoid this problem.
18047 \begin_layout Standard
18048 You can export to PostScript using the menu
18050 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18051 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18057 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18059 \begin_inset Index idx
18064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18066 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18081 \begin_inset Index idx
18086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18095 \begin_layout Standard
18096 This file type has the extension
18097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18113 Portable Document Format
18114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18121 was derived from PostScript.
18122 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
18124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18132 it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output looks exactly the same.
18135 \begin_layout Standard
18136 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
18137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18140 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18173 Portable Network Graphics
18174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18191 You can also use any other image format,
18192 because \SpecialChar LyX
18193 converts them in the background to one of these formats.
18194 But as described in the section about PostScript,
18195 the image conversion will slow down your workflow.
18196 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
18199 \begin_layout Standard
18200 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
18202 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18208 \begin_layout Description
18210 \begin_inset space ~
18213 (pdflatex) This uses the program
18217 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18220 \begin_layout Description
18222 \begin_inset space ~
18229 ) This uses the program
18231 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18234 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18237 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18246 that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
18247 \begin_inset space ~
18251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18253 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18259 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18260 is still a work in progress,
18261 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
18265 \begin_layout Description
18267 \begin_inset space ~
18274 ) This uses the program
18279 that converts your file directly to PDF.
18285 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
18286 \begin_inset space ~
18290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18292 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18298 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts,
18300 vertically written Japanese.
18303 \begin_layout Description
18305 \begin_inset space ~
18308 (cropped) This is the same as
18311 \begin_inset space ~
18316 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
18317 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
18318 to generate good-looking formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
18321 \begin_layout Description
18323 \begin_inset space ~
18326 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
18330 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to PDF.
18333 \begin_layout Description
18335 \begin_inset space ~
18338 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
18342 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
18343 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
18347 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
18348 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
18351 \begin_layout Standard
18355 \begin_inset space ~
18364 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions,
18367 and works without problems.
18368 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
18369 or specific OpenType fonts,
18370 you might want to try out
18373 \begin_inset space ~
18381 \begin_inset space ~
18387 bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature as
18394 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18396 \begin_inset Index idx
18401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18403 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18418 \begin_inset Index idx
18423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18432 \begin_layout Standard
18433 This file type has the extension
18434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18446 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
18447 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
18448 When \SpecialChar LyX
18450 it also generates corresponding images in formats suitable for the purpose.
18451 For the math output you can choose in the menu
18453 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18454 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18457 between different formats,
18458 which are described in section
18460 Math Output in XHTML
18465 \begin_inset space ~
18473 \begin_layout Standard
18474 XHTML output remains
18475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18483 and not all \SpecialChar LyX
18484 features are supported yet.
18488 and the World Wide Web
18493 Additional Features
18496 for more information.
18499 \begin_layout Standard
18500 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
18502 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18503 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18509 \begin_layout Subsection
18511 \begin_inset Index idx
18516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18518 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18535 \begin_layout Standard
18536 To get a look at the final version of your document,
18537 with all of the page breaks in place,
18538 the footnotes correctly numbered,
18548 or use the toolbar button
18555 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default output format,
18556 which is globally set in the preferences (see section
18557 \begin_inset space ~
18561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18563 reference "sec:File-Formats"
18568 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings (see section
18569 \begin_inset space ~
18573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18575 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
18581 Further output formats can be selected via
18583 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18584 View (Other Formats)
18586 or the toolbar button
18595 \begin_layout Standard
18596 If you have changed your document,
18597 you can refresh the output in the same viewer window using the menu
18599 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18604 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18605 Update (Other Formats)
18611 \begin_layout Standard
18612 When you preview a file,
18613 the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18614 's temporary directory.
18615 To have a real output,
18616 export your document.
18619 \begin_layout Section
18620 A few Words about Typography
18621 \begin_inset Index idx
18626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18635 \begin_layout Subsection
18637 Dashes and Minus Signs
18638 \begin_inset Index idx
18643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18650 \begin_inset Index idx
18655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18664 \begin_layout Standard
18665 In \SpecialChar LyX
18668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18679 symbol comes in four variants:
18700 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18706 \begin_layout Standard
18707 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18717 height_special "totalheight"
18722 backgroundcolor "none"
18725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18726 \begin_inset Tabular
18727 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18728 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18729 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18730 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18731 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18732 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18733 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18761 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18762 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18801 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18802 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18824 system key combination
18828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18830 the en dash is entered with
18833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18842 and the em dash with
18845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18858 is the Mac label for the right
18868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18881 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18882 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18905 system key combination or
18906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18920 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18933 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18972 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18978 \begin_layout Standard
18979 Dashes can also be inserted with
18981 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18983 \begin_inset space ~
18986 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18994 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014 for the en dash).
18997 \begin_layout Standard
18998 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign,
18999 which appears in math mode and has a length of its own.
19000 Here are some examples:
19003 \begin_layout Enumerate
19004 line- and page-breaks
19005 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19015 \begin_layout Enumerate
19018 \begin_inset space ~
19022 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19032 \begin_layout Enumerate
19033 The em dash is used without spaces:
19036 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19046 \begin_layout Enumerate
19047 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
19051 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19061 \begin_layout Standard
19063 \begin_inset CommandInset href
19065 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
19066 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
19074 \begin_layout Subsection
19075 Dashes and Line Breaks
19076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19078 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
19085 \begin_layout Standard
19086 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale,
19088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19094 \begin_layout Itemize
19096 line breaks are generally allowed after the dash,
19097 but no line break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
19100 \begin_layout Itemize
19102 dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start a new line.
19105 \begin_layout Itemize
19106 In French and Spanish,
19107 dashes around parenthetical statements are treated similar to brackets:
19108 line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
19111 \begin_layout Standard
19113 dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
19114 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19125 allows line breaks after hyphens and these en-dashes and em-dashes.
19128 \begin_layout Enumerate
19129 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
19130 \begin_inset space ~
19133 – common in British English and generally recommended by
19135 The Elements of Typographic Style
19138 \begin_inset space ~
19141 – can be prevented using non-breaking spaces.
19144 \begin_layout Enumerate
19145 Unwanted line breaks
19149 dashes must be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
19153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19156 Prevent Hyphenation
19161 \begin_inset space ~
19177 in \SpecialChar TeX
19179 a non-breaking space does not suffice.
19184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19185 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not in the document language.
19186 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French and Spanish.
19195 \begin_layout Itemize
19197 \begin_inset space ~
19201 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19211 height_special "totalheight"
19216 backgroundcolor "none"
19219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19228 \begin_layout Itemize
19230 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19240 height_special "totalheight"
19245 backgroundcolor "none"
19248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19250 \begin_inset space ~
19258 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19259 \begin_inset space ~
19262 – sont très utiles.
19265 \begin_layout Itemize
19270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19280 un inciso con rayas—
19285 \begin_layout Standard
19286 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
19287 \begin_inset space ~
19290 – in contrast to an overfull line
19291 \begin_inset space ~
19294 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19298 \begin_layout Standard
19299 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes,
19300 you can select the option
19302 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19303 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19304 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19305 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19310 \begin_layout Enumerate
19311 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
19312 They can be prevented using non-breaking spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
19318 \begin_layout Itemize
19320 \begin_inset space ~
19323 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19324 \begin_inset space ~
19327 – sont très utiles.
19331 \begin_layout Enumerate
19332 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
19333 \begin_inset Newline newline
19338 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19339 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19341 \begin_inset space ~
19345 \begin_inset space ~
19354 \begin_layout Itemize
19355 Em-dashes without spaces—
19356 \SpecialChar allowbreak
19357 common in American English—
19358 \SpecialChar allowbreak
19359 should be followed by a line break opportunity.
19362 \begin_layout Standard
19363 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
19364 \begin_inset space ~
19368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19370 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19382 \begin_layout Enumerate
19385 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em or en dashes (see section
19386 \begin_inset space ~
19390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19392 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19404 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
19407 \begin_layout Standard
19408 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
19410 \begin_inset space ~
19414 consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
19416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19423 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
19431 \begin_layout Standard
19432 Since \SpecialChar LyX
19434 \begin_inset space ~
19438 consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19439 in a way that prevents ligation to dashes.
19441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19448 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters (except in
19453 typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately after the input (unless the current text font is
19461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19462 The behavior was changed since
19463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19481 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output as non-breakable dashes.
19482 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
19490 \begin_layout Standard
19493 \begin_inset space ~
19501 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
19503 \begin_inset space ~
19506 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
19509 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19510 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19511 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19512 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19514 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
19519 If you used both literal and
19520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19527 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
19529 \begin_inset space ~
19533 you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
19536 \begin_layout Subsection
19538 \begin_inset Index idx
19543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19552 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
19559 \begin_layout Standard
19560 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
19561 but automatically in the output.
19562 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19568 \begin_inset Index idx
19573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19576 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19590 following the rules of the document language.
19592 does not hyphenate text in the
19596 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19599 \begin_layout Standard
19601 hyphenates almost perfectly;
19602 it only has problems with text in the
19606 font and with unusual constructs,
19608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19616 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19617 cannot break a word correctly,
19618 you can set hyphenation points manually.
19619 This is done with the menu
19621 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19622 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19624 \begin_inset space ~
19630 Note that adding hyphenation points disables the default ones:
19631 The word will no longer break at the places it previously would have.
19634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19641 that are common in word processors,
19642 these added hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19644 If no hyphenation is necessary or the automatic hyphenation is disabled,
19649 \begin_layout Standard
19650 If there is a word you use often that \SpecialChar LaTeX
19651 does not hyphenate correctly,
19652 you can tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
19653 how to hyphenate it by adding the command
19654 \begin_inset Flex Code
19657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19660 hyphenation{<patterns>}
19665 to the preamble which takes as its argument one or more words with their hyphenation points marked by a hyphen,
19667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19672 \begin_inset Flex Code
19675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19678 hyphenation{dis-quo-ta-tion dis-quo-ta-tions}
19683 You can also use this to prevent hyphenation of a word,
19685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19690 \begin_inset Flex Code
19693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19696 hyphenation{unbroken}
19702 If there are a lot of these hyphenation exceptions,
19703 you can collect them in a single file (say,
19705 \begin_inset Flex Code
19708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19714 ) and then import the file via:
19716 \begin_inset Flex Code
19719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19722 usepackage{myhyphens}
19728 Make sure to put the file somewhere \SpecialChar LaTeX
19729 can find it (see the section
19731 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
19741 \begin_layout Standard
19743 \begin_inset Flex Code
19746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19749 hyphenation{<patterns>}
19754 applies to the language that is current when the command is issued (in the preamble,
19755 this is usually the main language of the document).
19756 If you want to define patterns for specific languages without knowing which language is in effect,
19757 the language packages
19765 provide specific variants of the command:
19768 \begin_layout Itemize
19775 \begin_inset Flex Code
19778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19781 babelhyphenation[<language 1>,
19792 \begin_layout Itemize
19799 \begin_inset Flex Code
19802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19805 pghyphenation[<language options>]{<language>}{<patterns>}
19813 \begin_layout Standard
19815 depending on which language package you are using:
19818 \begin_layout Itemize
19819 \begin_inset Flex Code
19822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19825 babelhyphenation[german,ngerman,austrian,naustrian,swissgerman,
19826 \begin_inset Newline newline
19829 nswissgerman]{Ma-de}
19837 \begin_layout Itemize
19838 \begin_inset Flex Code
19841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19844 pghyphenation{german}{Ma-de}
19852 \begin_layout Standard
19853 in order to define the hyphenation points for all German varieties,
19857 \begin_layout Itemize
19858 \begin_inset Flex Code
19861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19864 babelhyphenation[naustrian]{Ma-de}
19872 \begin_layout Itemize
19873 \begin_inset Flex Code
19876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19879 pghyphenation[variant=austrian]{german}{Ma-de}
19887 \begin_layout Standard
19888 in order to define them only for the Austrian variety of German.
19891 \begin_layout Standard
19892 These commands only work after the language package has been loaded,
19893 which is usually after the user preamble.
19894 So it is advised that you embrace them in
19895 \begin_inset Flex Code
19898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19901 AtBeginDocument{\SpecialChar ldots
19908 which causes them to be issued at the end of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19912 \begin_layout Standard
19913 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19914 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document in the form
19915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19924 would then see the hyphen
19925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19932 as a line break possibility.
19933 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19934 To prevent the shortcut from being broken,
19935 you can use a non-breaking hyphen (
19937 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19938 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
19939 Non-Breaking Hyphen
19941 ) or put it into a makebox as described in the section
19943 Prevent Hyphenation
19948 \begin_inset space ~
19956 \begin_layout Subsection
19958 \begin_inset Index idx
19963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19972 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19973 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19974 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19976 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19983 \begin_layout Standard
19984 When \SpecialChar LyX
19985 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19986 to generate the final version of your document,
19988 automatically distinguishes between words,
19993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19996 appropriate amount of space.
19997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20000 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and the next word.
20001 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word gets after another word.
20004 \begin_layout Standard
20006 the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does not work in all cases.
20008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20019 is at the end of a lowercase letter,
20020 it's the end of a sentence;
20021 if it's at the end of a capitalized letter,
20022 it's an abbreviation.
20025 \begin_layout Standard
20026 Here are some examples of
20030 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
20033 \begin_layout Itemize
20038 \begin_layout Itemize
20043 \begin_layout Standard
20044 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
20047 \begin_layout Itemize
20049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20053 this is too much space!
20056 \begin_layout Itemize
20061 \begin_layout Standard
20062 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
20065 \begin_layout Standard
20066 To fix this problem,
20067 use one of the following:
20070 \begin_layout Enumerate
20074 \begin_inset space ~
20079 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
20080 \begin_inset space ~
20084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20086 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
20092 \begin_inset Index idx
20097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20099 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20116 \begin_layout Enumerate
20120 \begin_inset space ~
20125 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
20126 \begin_inset space ~
20130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20132 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
20138 \begin_inset Index idx
20143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20145 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20162 \begin_layout Enumerate
20166 \begin_inset space ~
20170 \begin_inset space ~
20174 \begin_inset space ~
20181 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20183 \begin_inset space ~
20188 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
20189 This function is also bound to
20192 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
20198 \begin_layout Standard
20199 With the corrections,
20200 our earlier examples look like this:
20203 \begin_layout Itemize
20205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20209 \begin_inset space \space{}
20212 this is too much space!
20215 \begin_layout Itemize
20216 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
20220 \begin_layout Standard
20221 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
20222 If your language is such a language,
20223 you don't need to worry,
20224 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
20225 will take care of this.
20228 \begin_layout Standard
20229 For those that do need to bother,
20230 there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
20234 \begin_inset space ~
20240 feature described in the section
20242 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
20247 Additional Features
20252 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20254 \begin_inset Index idx
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20261 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20276 \begin_inset Index idx
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20283 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
20286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20300 \begin_layout Standard
20302 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
20304 it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted text,
20305 and use a closing mark at the end.
20308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20316 The keyboard character,
20322 generates this automatically.
20325 \begin_layout Standard
20326 You can specify what character the
20330 key produces by using the submenu
20336 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20340 \begin_inset Index idx
20345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20347 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20361 dialog and switching the
20365 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
20366 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
20368 \begin_inset space ~
20374 \begin_layout Labeling
20375 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20387 \begin_inset space ~
20391 \begin_inset space ~
20395 \begin_inset Quotes els
20399 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20413 \begin_inset Quotes els
20417 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20420 quotation marks (as common,
20422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20429 \begin_layout Labeling
20430 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20433 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20437 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20441 \begin_inset space ~
20445 \begin_inset space ~
20449 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20453 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20459 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20463 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20467 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20471 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20474 quotation marks (as common,
20476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20483 \begin_layout Labeling
20484 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20487 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20491 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20495 \begin_inset space ~
20499 \begin_inset space ~
20503 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20507 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20513 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20517 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20521 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20525 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20528 quotation marks (as common,
20530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20537 \begin_layout Labeling
20538 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20541 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20545 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20549 \begin_inset space ~
20553 \begin_inset space ~
20557 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20561 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20567 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20571 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20575 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20579 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20582 quotation marks (as common,
20584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20591 \begin_layout Labeling
20592 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20595 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20599 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20603 \begin_inset space ~
20607 \begin_inset space ~
20611 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20615 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20621 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20625 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20629 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20633 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20636 quotation marks (as common,
20638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20645 \begin_layout Labeling
20646 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20649 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20653 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20657 \begin_inset space ~
20661 \begin_inset space ~
20665 \begin_inset Quotes als
20669 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20675 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20679 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20683 \begin_inset Quotes als
20687 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20690 quotation marks (as common,
20692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20699 \begin_layout Labeling
20700 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20703 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20707 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20711 \begin_inset space ~
20715 \begin_inset space ~
20719 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20723 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20729 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20733 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20737 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20741 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20744 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
20747 \begin_layout Labeling
20748 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20751 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20755 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20759 \begin_inset space ~
20763 \begin_inset space ~
20767 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20771 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20777 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20781 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20785 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20789 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20792 quotation marks (as common,
20794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20801 \begin_layout Labeling
20802 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20805 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20809 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20813 \begin_inset space ~
20817 \begin_inset space ~
20821 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20825 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20831 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20835 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20839 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20843 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20846 quotation marks (as common,
20848 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20855 \begin_layout Labeling
20856 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20859 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20863 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20867 \begin_inset space ~
20871 \begin_inset space ~
20875 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20879 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20885 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20889 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20893 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20897 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20900 quotation marks (another style common in France)
20904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20905 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
20906 since these look identical to the inner marks.
20907 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where the inner marks differ).
20915 \begin_layout Labeling
20916 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20919 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20923 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20927 \begin_inset space ~
20931 \begin_inset space ~
20935 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20939 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20945 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20949 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20953 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20957 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20960 quotation marks (as common,
20962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20969 \begin_layout Labeling
20970 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20973 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20977 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20981 \begin_inset space ~
20985 \begin_inset space ~
20989 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20993 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20999 \begin_inset Quotes wld
21003 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
21007 \begin_inset Quotes wls
21011 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
21014 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
21017 \begin_layout Labeling
21018 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21021 \begin_inset Quotes pld
21025 \begin_inset Quotes prd
21029 \begin_inset space ~
21033 \begin_inset space ~
21037 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21041 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21049 \begin_inset Quotes pld
21057 \begin_inset Quotes prd
21065 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21073 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21078 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
21081 \begin_layout Labeling
21082 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21083 \begin_inset Quotes jld
21091 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
21097 \begin_inset space ~
21101 \begin_inset space ~
21107 \begin_inset Quotes jls
21115 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
21119 \begin_inset Quotes jld
21123 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
21127 \begin_inset Quotes jls
21131 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
21134 quotation marks (as common,
21136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21147 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
21151 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
21159 \begin_layout Labeling
21160 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21161 \begin_inset Quotes kld
21169 \begin_inset Quotes krd
21175 \begin_inset space ~
21179 \begin_inset space ~
21185 \begin_inset Quotes kls
21193 \begin_inset Quotes krs
21197 \begin_inset Quotes kld
21201 \begin_inset Quotes krd
21205 \begin_inset Quotes kls
21209 \begin_inset Quotes krs
21212 quotation marks (as common,
21214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21218 in North Korea and China)
21219 \begin_inset script superscript
21221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21224 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
21240 \begin_layout Labeling
21241 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21244 \begin_inset Quotes dld
21248 \begin_inset Quotes drd
21252 \begin_inset space ~
21256 \begin_inset space ~
21260 \begin_inset Quotes dls
21264 \begin_inset Quotes drs
21270 \begin_inset Quotes dld
21276 \begin_inset Quotes drd
21282 \begin_inset Quotes dls
21288 \begin_inset Quotes drs
21293 quotation marks (as common in Israel)
21296 \begin_layout Standard
21297 Inner quotation marks
21301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21302 In many writing cultures,
21303 these are single quotation marks.
21304 But as the British and French styles show,
21305 this is not necessarily the case (and specifically the British style shows that
21306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21313 does not necessarily mean
21314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21322 This is why we call them
21323 \begin_inset Quotes els
21327 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21343 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages,
21345 \begin_inset Quotes els
21349 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21352 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
21355 arg "quote-insert inner"
21360 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21366 \begin_layout Standard
21368 the quotation mark styles are persistent.
21370 a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when it was inserted,
21371 even if the document-wide style changes.
21372 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
21373 If you check the setting
21375 Use dynamic quotation marks
21379 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21380 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21385 special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
21386 they appear in a special color).
21387 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
21388 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in one step (e.
21389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21393 if your publisher requests a different style).
21396 \begin_layout Standard
21397 Individual quotation marks (i.
21398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21402 their level [inner,
21406 and style) can be easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a mark.
21409 \begin_layout Subsection
21411 \begin_inset Index idx
21416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21418 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21433 \begin_inset Index idx
21438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21440 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
21443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21457 name "subsec:Ligatures"
21464 \begin_layout Standard
21465 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and print them as single characters.
21466 These groups are known as
21471 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
21472 knows about ligatures,
21473 your documents will contain them too in the output.
21474 Here are the standard ligatures:
21477 \begin_layout Itemize
21481 \begin_layout Itemize
21485 \begin_layout Itemize
21489 \begin_layout Itemize
21493 \begin_layout Itemize
21497 \begin_layout Standard
21498 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
21501 \begin_layout Standard
21503 you don't want a ligature in a word.
21504 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
21506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21513 it looks really weird in compound words,
21515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21530 To break a ligature,
21533 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21534 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21536 \begin_inset space ~
21543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21554 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21571 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21579 \begin_layout Subsection
21581 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
21583 \begin_inset Index idx
21588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21591 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21608 \begin_layout Standard
21611 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21612 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
21617 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
21620 \begin_layout Description
21622 The name of the game.
21625 \begin_layout Description
21627 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
21631 \begin_layout Description
21633 The \SpecialChar TeX
21634 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
21638 \begin_layout Description
21639 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
21640 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21644 \begin_layout Standard
21645 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21651 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
21655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21659 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
21660 world to give programs geek version numbers.
21661 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
21662 converges to the number
21663 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
21667 The actual version is
21668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21677 the previous one was
21678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21689 \begin_layout Subsection
21691 \begin_inset Index idx
21696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21698 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21715 \begin_layout Standard
21716 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal space between two words.
21717 As you can see in the example below,
21718 it looks better when the space is smaller.
21720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21727 for units use the menu
21729 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21730 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21732 \begin_inset space ~
21740 arg "space-insert thin"
21746 \begin_layout Standard
21747 Here is an example to show the differences:
21750 \begin_layout Standard
21751 \begin_inset Tabular
21752 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
21753 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21754 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21755 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21762 \begin_inset space ~
21766 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21778 space between number and unit
21785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21794 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21806 half space between number and unit
21819 \begin_layout Subsection
21821 \begin_inset Index idx
21826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21828 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21845 \begin_layout Standard
21846 In the early days of word processors,
21847 page breaks went wherever the page happened to end.
21848 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
21849 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom of the page,
21850 the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page,
21851 or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
21852 These bits of text became known as
21863 \begin_layout Standard
21866 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
21867 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
21868 But what about widows and orphans,
21869 where the page breaks leave one line of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page?
21870 There are rules built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
21871 governing page breaks,
21872 and some of those rules are there specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
21873 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them,
21874 you can add the commands
21875 \begin_inset Newline newline
21883 \begin_inset Newline newline
21891 \begin_inset Newline newline
21894 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21895 preamble of your document to avoid them.
21896 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
21898 \begin_inset space ~
21902 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21904 key "latexcompanion"
21910 \begin_inset space ~
21914 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21921 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21922 's page break mechanism.
21925 \begin_layout Chapter
21929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21931 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
21938 \begin_layout Standard
21939 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21942 \begin_inset space ~
21948 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21951 \begin_layout Section
21953 \begin_inset Index idx
21958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21974 \begin_layout Standard
21976 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
21979 \begin_layout Description
21982 \begin_inset space ~
21985 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
21986 \begin_inset Newline newline
21990 \begin_inset Note Note
21993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21994 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
22002 \begin_layout Description
22003 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
22004 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
22007 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
22008 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
22010 \begin_inset space ~
22016 \begin_inset Newline newline
22020 \begin_inset Note Comment
22023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22024 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
22033 \begin_layout Description
22035 \begin_inset space ~
22038 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can set in the document settings under
22040 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
22042 \begin_inset space ~
22048 \begin_inset Newline newline
22052 \begin_inset Newline newline
22056 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22065 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
22066 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
22071 of a comment that appears in the output.
22077 \begin_inset Newline newline
22081 \begin_inset Newline newline
22084 As you can see in the example,
22085 greyed out notes can have footnotes.
22088 \begin_layout Standard
22089 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
22097 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22101 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
22104 \begin_layout Section
22106 \begin_inset Index idx
22111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22118 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22120 name "sec:Footnotes"
22127 \begin_layout Standard
22129 uses boxes to display footnotes:
22130 When you insert a footnote using the menu
22132 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22135 or the toolbar button
22138 arg "footnote-insert"
22152 \begin_inset Graphics
22153 filename clipart/footnote.png
22162 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
22163 's representation of your footnote.
22173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22197 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
22198 Clicking on the box label again will close
22211 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote,
22212 simply highlight it and click on the footnote
22227 \begin_layout Standard
22228 Here is an example footnote:
22236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22237 To close a footnote,
22238 click on the footnote box label.
22246 \begin_layout Standard
22247 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text position where the footnote box is placed.
22248 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
22249 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
22250 according to the document class.
22252 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme,
22253 but you can get other schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22259 ey are described in the
22262 \begin_inset space ~
22270 \begin_layout Section
22272 \begin_inset Index idx
22277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22284 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22286 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
22293 \begin_layout Standard
22294 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
22296 When you insert a margin note via the menu
22298 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22300 \begin_inset space ~
22305 or the toolbar button
22308 arg "marginalnote-insert"
22328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22335 appearing within your text.
22336 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
22337 's representation of your margin
22346 \begin_layout Standard
22347 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
22351 \begin_inset Marginal
22354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22356 This is a marginal note.
22364 \begin_layout Standard
22365 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
22366 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even pages,
22367 right on odd pages.
22370 \begin_layout Standard
22371 For further information about marginal notes see the section
22374 \begin_inset space ~
22382 \begin_inset space ~
22390 \begin_layout Section
22391 Graphics and Images
22392 \begin_inset Index idx
22397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22404 \begin_inset Index idx
22409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22418 name "sec:Graphics"
22425 \begin_layout Standard
22426 To insert an image in your document,
22427 place the cursor at the text position you want and click on the toolbar icon
22430 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22439 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
22442 \begin_layout Standard
22443 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
22448 tab allows you to choose your image file.
22449 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling factor.
22450 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
22451 \begin_inset space ~
22455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22457 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
22465 \begin_layout Standard
22470 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width of the image in the output.
22471 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
22474 \begin_inset space ~
22478 \begin_inset space ~
22487 \begin_inset space ~
22491 \begin_inset space ~
22495 \begin_inset space ~
22500 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
22501 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore the tab
22508 \begin_layout Standard
22512 \begin_inset space ~
22516 \begin_inset space ~
22521 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
22522 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
22524 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
22529 \begin_inset space ~
22534 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output,
22535 only a frame with the image size is printed.
22538 \begin_layout Standard
22539 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
22540 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are in the text.
22541 This is an example image within a separate,
22542 horizontally centered paragraph:
22545 \begin_layout Standard
22547 \begin_inset Graphics
22548 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
22556 \begin_layout Standard
22557 If you need image captions or want to reference images,
22558 you have to put the image into a float,
22560 \begin_inset space ~
22564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22566 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22574 \begin_layout Subsection
22576 \begin_inset Index idx
22581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22583 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22600 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
22607 \begin_layout Standard
22608 You can insert images in any known file format.
22609 But as we explained in section
22610 \begin_inset space ~
22614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22616 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22622 every output document format allows only a few image formats.
22624 therefore uses the program
22628 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
22629 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
22630 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
22631 \begin_inset space ~
22635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22637 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22645 \begin_layout Standard
22646 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
22649 \begin_layout Description
22651 \begin_inset space ~
22654 images consist of pixel values,
22655 often in a compressed form.
22656 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
22657 Well-known bitmap image formats are
22658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22661 Graphics Interchange Format
22662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22679 \begin_inset Index idx
22684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22686 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22705 Portable Network Graphics
22706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22723 \begin_inset Index idx
22728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22730 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22749 Joint Photographic Experts Group
22750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22779 \begin_inset Index idx
22784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22786 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22803 \begin_layout Description
22805 \begin_inset space ~
22808 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without data loss.
22809 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations,
22810 because presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
22811 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
22812 \begin_inset Newline newline
22815 Scalable image formats can be
22816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22819 Scalable Vector Graphics
22820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22837 \begin_inset Index idx
22842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22844 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22863 Encapsulated PostScript
22864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22881 \begin_inset Index idx
22886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22888 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22907 Portable Document Format
22908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22925 \begin_inset Index idx
22930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22946 because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the result will not be scalable.
22947 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original image.
22951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22952 In the case of PDF,
22953 the original image is additionally compressed.
22961 \begin_layout Standard
22962 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one,
22970 \begin_layout Subsection
22971 Grouping of Image Settings
22972 \begin_inset Index idx
22977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22979 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22996 \begin_layout Standard
22997 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing group.
22998 Images within such a group share their settings,
22999 so adjusting one image of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in the same way.
23000 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the need to manually change each of them.
23003 \begin_layout Standard
23004 A new group can be set by pressing the button
23007 \begin_inset space ~
23011 \begin_inset space ~
23023 \begin_inset space ~
23027 \begin_inset space ~
23033 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image and checking the name of the desired group.
23036 \begin_layout Section
23038 \begin_inset Index idx
23043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23059 \begin_layout Standard
23060 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
23063 arg "tabular-insert"
23068 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23072 A dialog will appear,
23073 asking you for the number of rows and columns,
23074 and you can select a specific (border) style.
23075 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated from the rest of the table.
23076 This separation appears due to a double line:
23077 The cells of the first row have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above them.
23078 Here is an example table:
23081 \begin_layout Standard
23083 \begin_inset Tabular
23084 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
23085 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23088 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
23089 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23285 \begin_layout Standard
23286 This corresponds to the
23287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23294 table style listed in the style selection.
23297 \begin_layout Standard
23298 Other available styles include:
23301 \begin_layout Itemize
23303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23310 which looks line the above table,
23311 but without the first row being separated via double line,
23314 \begin_layout Itemize
23315 a border-less table with no lines at all,
23318 \begin_layout Itemize
23320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23327 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and bold top/bottom lines (see
23337 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last line.
23340 \begin_layout Standard
23341 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar button can be changed in
23343 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23344 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23348 So if the default style above is not the one you need,
23349 you should alter this setting.
23352 \begin_layout Subsection
23356 \begin_layout Standard
23357 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and then choosing
23359 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
23363 This brings up the table dialog.
23364 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell,
23365 row and/or column where the cursor is placed currently.
23366 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
23367 This means that if you select more cells,
23368 columns or rows the action is done on all of your selection.
23371 \begin_layout Standard
23372 In addition to the table dialog,
23376 \begin_inset space ~
23381 helps you in setting table properties.
23382 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
23385 \begin_layout Standard
23389 \begin_inset space ~
23394 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
23395 If you add a row or column,
23396 it will be inserted right beside or below the current cell respectively.
23397 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width is given.
23398 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs of text,
23400 \begin_inset space ~
23404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23406 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
23414 \begin_layout Standard
23415 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell using the check box
23424 This will merge the cells to
23429 spread over more than one column/row.
23430 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows,
23431 so that the alignment,
23433 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
23434 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one in the last row without the upper border:
23437 \begin_layout Standard
23439 \begin_inset Tabular
23440 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
23441 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
23442 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23443 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
23444 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
23445 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23456 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23465 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23541 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23576 \begin_layout Standard
23577 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
23578 -arguments for the table.
23579 They are necessary for special table formatting,
23580 such as the multirow cells,
23581 explained in the chapter
23588 \begin_inset space ~
23594 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
23595 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
23596 but are visible in the output.
23599 \begin_layout Standard
23600 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
23603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23609 Most DVI-viewers are
23613 able to display rotations.
23621 \begin_layout Standard
23626 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
23631 adds lines for all cell borders.
23634 \begin_layout Subsection
23636 \begin_inset Index idx
23641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23643 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23658 \begin_inset Index idx
23663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23672 \begin_layout Standard
23673 If the table is too long to fit on one page,
23674 you can use the option
23677 \begin_inset space ~
23681 \begin_inset space ~
23689 \begin_inset space ~
23694 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
23695 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
23698 \begin_layout Description
23704 The current row and all rows above,
23705 that don't have any special options defined,
23706 are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
23707 Except for the first page,
23711 \begin_inset space ~
23719 \begin_layout Description
23723 \begin_inset space ~
23729 The current row and all rows above,
23730 that don't have any special options defined,
23731 are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
23734 \begin_layout Description
23740 The current row and all rows below,
23741 that don't have any special options defined,
23742 are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
23743 except for the last page,
23747 \begin_inset space ~
23755 \begin_layout Description
23759 \begin_inset space ~
23765 The current row and all rows below,
23766 that don't have any special options defined,
23767 are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
23770 \begin_layout Description
23772 The first row is reset as a single column.
23773 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
23775 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23779 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
23782 \begin_inset space ~
23790 \begin_layout Standard
23791 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
23792 If you set more than one option in the same table row,
23793 you should be aware that then only the first option is used;
23794 the others will be defined as
23800 first means first in this order:
23805 \begin_inset space ~
23819 \begin_inset space ~
23825 see the following longtable to see how it works:
23828 \begin_layout Standard
23830 \begin_inset Tabular
23831 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
23832 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
23833 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
23834 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23835 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23836 <row endfirsthead="true">
23837 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23843 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
23848 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23857 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23867 <row endfirsthead="true">
23868 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23879 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23888 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23900 <row endhead="true">
23901 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23912 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23921 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23931 <row endhead="true">
23932 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23952 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23964 <row endfoot="true">
23965 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23976 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23985 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24016 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24958 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24967 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24976 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24987 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25018 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25049 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25080 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25111 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25142 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25173 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25204 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25235 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25266 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25297 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25328 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25359 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25390 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25421 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25452 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25483 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25514 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25545 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25576 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25607 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25638 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25670 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25701 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25732 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25763 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25794 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25825 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25856 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25887 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25918 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25948 <row endlastfoot="true">
25949 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25960 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
25963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25969 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25986 \begin_layout Subsection
25988 \begin_inset Index idx
25993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25995 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26012 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
26019 \begin_layout Standard
26020 A table cell can contain text,
26024 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
26025 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
26026 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
26032 nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
26035 \begin_layout Standard
26036 To have multi-line entries in table cells,
26037 you have to declare a fixed width for the column in the table dialog.
26038 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
26042 \begin_layout Standard
26044 \begin_inset Tabular
26045 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
26046 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26047 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26048 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
26049 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26069 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26138 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
26143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26194 This is longer now.
26199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26250 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
26251 This is longer now.
26256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26282 \begin_layout Standard
26283 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
26284 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
26288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26289 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
26294 Selection with the mouse or with
26298 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
26299 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting the selection from outside the table.
26302 \begin_layout Section
26304 \begin_inset Index idx
26309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26325 \begin_layout Subsection
26329 \begin_layout Standard
26330 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label,
26331 which doesn't have a fixed location.
26333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26340 forward or backward a page or two,
26341 to wherever it fits best.
26349 \begin_inset space ~
26355 because they can float to the next page when there are too many notes on the current page.
26358 \begin_layout Standard
26359 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
26360 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace and pages without text.
26361 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and the image/table,
26362 every float can be referenced in the text.
26363 Floats are therefore numbered.
26364 Referencing is described in section
26365 \begin_inset space ~
26369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26371 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26379 \begin_layout Standard
26383 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26387 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
26388 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in the output.
26389 After the label you can insert the caption text.
26390 \begin_inset Index idx
26395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26397 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26411 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate paragraph within the float.
26412 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
26413 -document readable,
26414 you can open and close the float box by left-clicking on the box label.
26415 A closed float box looks like this:
26417 \begin_inset Graphics
26418 filename clipart/float.png
26423 – a gray button with a red label.
26426 \begin_layout Standard
26427 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
26428 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
26431 \begin_layout Subsection
26433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26435 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
26440 \begin_inset Index idx
26445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26447 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26464 \begin_layout Standard
26466 \begin_inset space ~
26470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26472 reference "fig:A-star-in"
26477 was created using the menu
26479 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26480 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26486 arg "float-insert figure"
26490 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and using the menu
26492 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26498 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
26502 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor to the left or right of the image and using the menu
26504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26506 \begin_inset space ~
26514 arg "layout-paragraph"
26520 \begin_layout Standard
26521 \begin_inset Float figure
26528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26530 \begin_inset Graphics
26531 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26541 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26546 name "fig:A-star-in"
26563 \begin_layout Standard
26564 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference to it:
26565 Insert a label into the caption using the menu
26567 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26576 ) and refer to it using the menu
26578 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26584 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26588 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using vague references like
26589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26598 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
26599 will reposition the floats in the final document,
26601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26609 For more about cross-references,
26611 \begin_inset space ~
26615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26617 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26625 \begin_layout Standard
26626 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float,
26627 but sometimes you might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
26628 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
26629 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures as described in section
26630 \begin_inset space ~
26634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26636 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26643 \begin_inset space ~
26647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26649 reference "fig:Two-images"
26654 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
26655 You can also set the images one below the other.
26657 \begin_inset space ~
26661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26663 reference "fig:Undefinable"
26669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26671 reference "fig:Star"
26676 are the subfigures.
26679 \begin_layout Standard
26680 \begin_inset Float figure
26687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26688 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26692 \begin_inset Float figure
26699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26700 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26705 name "fig:Undefinable"
26717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26718 \begin_inset Graphics
26719 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
26731 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26735 \begin_inset Float figure
26742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26743 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26761 \begin_inset Graphics
26762 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26774 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26781 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26786 name "fig:Two-images"
26803 \begin_layout Subsection
26805 \begin_inset Index idx
26810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26812 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26829 \begin_layout Standard
26830 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
26832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26833 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26836 or the toolbar button
26839 arg "float-insert table"
26843 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures and that the label begins with “tab:”.
26845 \begin_inset space ~
26849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26851 reference "tab:Table-float"
26859 \begin_layout Standard
26860 \begin_inset Float table
26867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26868 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26873 name "tab:Table-float"
26885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26887 \begin_inset Tabular
26888 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
26889 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26890 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26891 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26892 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27019 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
27027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27040 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
27043 \end{array}\right]$
27051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27064 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
27085 \begin_layout Subsection
27087 \begin_inset Index idx
27092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27094 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27111 \begin_layout Standard
27113 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
27114 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme,
27115 to control the float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float caption.
27116 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
27123 \begin_inset space ~
27131 \begin_layout Section
27133 \begin_inset Index idx
27138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27147 \begin_layout Standard
27149 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
27152 all the usual rules of indentation,
27155 \begin_inset space \space{}
27161 \begin_layout Standard
27162 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
27163 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
27165 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27169 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage and its alignment within the page.
27172 \begin_layout Standard
27174 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27184 height_special "totalheight"
27189 backgroundcolor "none"
27192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27195 This is a minipage.
27196 The text is set in an italic style.
27199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27202 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs another formatting.
27210 \begin_layout Standard
27211 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
27214 If you place two minipages side-by-side,
27219 as described in section
27220 \begin_inset space ~
27224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27226 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
27232 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
27238 \begin_layout Standard
27239 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27249 height_special "totalheight"
27254 backgroundcolor "none"
27257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27258 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
27259 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
27265 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
27269 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27279 height_special "totalheight"
27284 backgroundcolor "none"
27287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27288 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
27289 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
27297 \begin_layout Standard
27298 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27304 \begin_layout Standard
27305 When you right-click on a minipage box,
27306 you can transform the box to another box type.
27307 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
27314 \begin_inset space ~
27322 \begin_layout Chapter
27323 Mathematical Formulas
27324 \begin_inset Index idx
27329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27336 \begin_inset Index idx
27341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27343 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
27346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27358 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27360 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
27367 \begin_layout Standard
27368 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
27373 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
27376 \begin_layout Section
27378 \begin_inset Index idx
27383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27385 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27402 \begin_layout Standard
27403 To create a math formula,
27404 you can just click on the toolbar icon
27417 That will create a little blue rectangle,
27418 with purple markers around its corners.
27419 That blue rectangle is the formula itself;
27420 the purple markers indicate what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
27421 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
27423 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27429 \begin_layout Standard
27430 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done with the
27433 \begin_inset space ~
27439 that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
27442 \begin_layout Standard
27443 There are two main types of formulas,
27444 inline formulas and display formulas.
27445 Inline formulas appear within a text line,
27449 \begin_layout Standard
27450 This is a line with an inline formula
27451 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
27457 \begin_layout Standard
27458 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate paragraph,
27460 \begin_inset Formula
27467 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
27470 \begin_layout Standard
27472 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
27476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27490 followed by a space,
27491 in a formula will create the Greek letter
27492 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
27496 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
27499 \begin_inset space ~
27507 \begin_layout Subsection
27508 Navigating in Formulas
27509 \begin_inset Index idx
27514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27516 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27533 \begin_layout Standard
27534 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is achieved with the arrow keys.
27536 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
27537 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
27542 will leave a formula construct (a square root
27543 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
27548 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
27553 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
27556 \end{array}\right]$
27564 will leave the formula,
27565 placing the cursor after the formula.
27570 can be used to move horizontally in a formula;
27572 through the cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
27575 \begin_layout Standard
27581 printed in this document as
27582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27586 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27594 seems to do nothing in a formula,
27595 since it does not add a space between characters,
27596 but it does exit a nested structure.
27598 you have to be careful about using
27605 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
27614 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27624 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27628 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27634 since in the latter case only the
27637 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
27642 will be under the square root sign:
27644 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
27650 \begin_layout Standard
27651 You can leave many parts of a formula,
27653 partially filled in,
27655 \begin_inset Formula
27657 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27666 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in,
27667 or a subscript with nothing in it,
27668 the results will be unpredictable,
27669 but most constructs don't mind.
27672 \begin_layout Subsection
27676 \begin_layout Standard
27677 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
27678 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want,
27683 and a cursor movement key to select text.
27684 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
27686 you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
27687 That text can then be cut or copied,
27688 and then pasted within any formula,
27689 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
27693 \begin_layout Subsection
27694 Exponents and Subscripts
27695 \begin_inset Index idx
27700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27702 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27717 \begin_inset Index idx
27722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27724 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27741 \begin_layout Standard
27742 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
27745 arg "math-superscript"
27751 arg "math-subscript"
27755 but it is often much easier to use a command.
27757 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
27764 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27774 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
27781 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
27786 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
27793 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27799 If you use characters in the superscript,
27800 that could be accented with the circumflex
27801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27809 you have to use an extra
27813 to separate the circumflex and the character.
27816 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
27823 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27829 Subscripts are similar:
27831 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
27838 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27846 \begin_layout Subsection
27848 \begin_inset Index idx
27853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27855 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27872 \begin_layout Standard
27873 Create a fraction either with the command
27879 or by using the icon
27882 arg "math-insert \\frac"
27888 \begin_inset space ~
27894 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
27895 The cursor is above the fraction line.
27896 To move it to the bottom,
27908 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction,
27909 as this example shows:
27910 \begin_inset Formula
27912 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
27915 \end{array}\right)}\right]
27923 \begin_layout Subsection
27925 \begin_inset Index idx
27930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27932 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27949 \begin_layout Standard
27950 Roots can be created using the
27953 \begin_inset space ~
27961 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
27967 arg "math-insert \\root"
27989 you can produce roots of higher orders,
27997 always produces a square root.
28000 \begin_layout Subsection
28001 Operators with Limits
28002 \begin_inset Index idx
28007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28009 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28024 \begin_inset Index idx
28029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28031 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28048 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
28055 \begin_layout Standard
28057 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
28061 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
28064 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
28065 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28066 by entering them as you would enter a super- or subscript,
28067 directly after the symbol.
28068 The sum operator will automatically place its
28069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28076 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas,
28077 and to the side in inline formulas,
28079 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
28084 \begin_inset Formula
28086 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
28093 will place the limits to the side in both formula types.
28096 \begin_layout Standard
28097 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in display mode.
28098 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly behind the operator and using the menu
28100 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28101 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28103 \begin_inset space ~
28107 \begin_inset space ~
28121 \begin_layout Standard
28122 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
28123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28132 \begin_inset Index idx
28137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28139 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28154 \begin_inset Formula
28156 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
28161 which will place the
28162 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
28166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28174 In inline formulas it looks like this:
28176 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
28182 \begin_layout Standard
28183 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
28190 Have a look at section
28191 \begin_inset space ~
28195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28197 reference "subsec:Functions"
28202 for an explanation of function macros.
28205 \begin_layout Subsection
28207 \begin_inset Index idx
28212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28214 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28231 \begin_layout Standard
28232 Most math symbols can be found in the
28235 \begin_inset space ~
28240 under one of several categories;
28261 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
28264 \begin_layout Standard
28265 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28266 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
28267 you don't have to use the
28270 \begin_inset space ~
28276 you can type the command directly into the formula.
28278 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
28281 \begin_layout Subsection
28283 \begin_inset Index idx
28288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28290 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28307 \begin_layout Standard
28308 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28314 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
28320 \begin_inset space ~
28328 arg "math-insert \\space"
28332 This generates a small space,
28333 and shows a small marker on the screen.
28341 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
28344 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28346 \begin_inset Graphics
28347 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
28352 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind the space marker and enter space again several times.
28353 With every space enter the size will be changed.
28354 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
28356 because they are negative spaces.
28357 Here are two examples:
28360 \begin_layout Standard
28371 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
28377 \begin_layout Standard
28388 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
28394 \begin_layout Subsection
28396 \begin_inset Index idx
28401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28403 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28420 name "subsec:Functions"
28427 \begin_layout Standard
28431 \begin_inset space ~
28436 contains under the button
28439 arg "math-insert \\functions"
28442 a number of function macros,
28444 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
28449 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
28458 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
28465 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to avoid confusions,
28467 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
28471 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
28477 \begin_layout Standard
28478 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
28480 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
28484 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
28490 \begin_layout Standard
28491 For some mathematical objects,
28493 the macro changes where subscripts are placed,
28494 as described in section
28495 \begin_inset space ~
28499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28501 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
28509 \begin_layout Subsection
28511 \begin_inset Index idx
28516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28518 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28535 \begin_layout Standard
28536 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text mode.
28537 This may depend on your keyboard,
28538 or the bindings file you use.
28539 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28543 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
28546 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
28547 Our example is entered by typing
28552 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28559 \begin_inset space ~
28563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28565 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
28570 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
28573 \begin_layout Standard
28574 \begin_inset Float table
28581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28582 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28587 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
28591 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
28599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28601 \begin_inset Tabular
28602 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
28603 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28604 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28605 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28606 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28690 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
28700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28744 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
28754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28798 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
28808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28852 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
28862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28906 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
28916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28960 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
28970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29014 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
29024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29068 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
29078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29122 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
29132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29167 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
29188 \begin_layout Standard
29189 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
29192 \begin_inset space ~
29200 arg "math-insert \\hat"
29204 this will apply to any selection you have made within a formula too.
29207 \begin_layout Section
29208 Brackets and Delimiters
29209 \begin_inset Index idx
29214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29216 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29231 \begin_inset Index idx
29236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29238 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29255 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
29262 \begin_layout Standard
29263 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
29266 using just the keys
29271 But if you want to surround a large structure,
29272 like a matrix or a fraction,
29273 or if you have several layers of brackets,
29274 it is better to use the math toolbar delimiter icon
29277 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
29282 if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
29283 \begin_inset Formula
29285 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
29293 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
29295 the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
29298 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
29301 and the expression on the right was entered using the
29307 \begin_inset Formula
29309 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
29317 \begin_layout Standard
29318 If you use the delimiter icon,
29320 and other brackets from that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is inside.
29323 \begin_layout Standard
29324 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the left side and right side.
29325 If you use the option
29328 \begin_inset space ~
29334 the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
29335 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
29337 If you want one side not to have a bracket,
29343 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
29344 with a dotted line,
29345 but nothing will be printed.
29348 \begin_layout Standard
29349 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures,
29350 like a square root,
29351 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to go inside the brackets.
29352 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
29357 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses,
29360 on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
29362 to insert a pair of parentheses,
29363 select the structure and enter
29366 arg "math-delim ( )"
29372 \begin_layout Section
29373 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
29374 \begin_inset Index idx
29379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29381 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29396 \begin_inset Index idx
29401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29403 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29418 \begin_inset Index idx
29423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29425 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29429 Multi-line Equations
29442 \begin_layout Standard
29443 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
29447 \begin_inset space ~
29455 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
29459 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
29460 Here is an example:
29461 \begin_inset Formula
29463 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
29472 The parentheses aren't automatic,
29473 but you can add them as described in section
29474 \begin_inset space ~
29478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29480 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
29486 When you construct the matrix,
29487 you can decide whether the column entries will be left-,
29489 or center-justified.
29490 This alignment is set in the box
29495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29546 for every column as default.
29549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29560 means that the first column will be left-justified,
29561 the second will be centered,
29562 and the third column will be right-justified,
29563 because each letter corresponds to the relevant column.
29564 The result will look like this:
29565 \begin_inset Formula
29568 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
29569 column & has & has\,right\\
29570 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
29579 \begin_layout Standard
29580 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
29583 arg "newline-insert newline"
29586 while the cursor is in the matrix.
29587 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
29589 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29592 or the math toolbar.
29595 \begin_layout Standard
29596 There are other arrays used in formulas,
29597 such as distinctions of cases.
29598 It can be created with the menu
29600 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29601 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29603 \begin_inset space ~
29615 Here is an example:
29617 \begin_inset Formula
29631 \begin_layout Standard
29632 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29635 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
29638 arg "newline-insert newline"
29642 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear,
29643 one for each column.
29647 arg "newline-insert newline"
29650 in a non-empty formula,
29651 the part before the relation sign (equal sign
29652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29659 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column,
29660 the relation sign is in the second column,
29661 and the rest in the third column.
29662 A new row is created by every further entry of
29665 arg "newline-insert newline"
29669 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
29670 Here is an example:
29671 \begin_inset Formula
29673 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
29674 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
29679 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
29680 \begin_inset Formula
29682 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
29690 \begin_layout Standard
29691 The multi-line formula type described here is called
29698 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
29699 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
29700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29702 reference "eq:asquared"
29708 The other types are described in section
29709 \begin_inset space ~
29713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29715 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29723 \begin_layout Section
29724 Formula Numbering and Referencing
29725 \begin_inset Index idx
29730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29732 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29747 \begin_inset Index idx
29752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29754 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29758 Referencing formulas
29769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29771 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29778 \begin_layout Standard
29779 To number a formula,
29780 set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
29782 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29783 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29785 \begin_inset space ~
29789 \begin_inset space ~
29797 arg "math-number-toggle"
29801 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29802 within parentheses.
29803 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
29804 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on the document class.
29805 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
29806 separated by a dot:
29807 \begin_inset Formula
29817 arg "math-number-toggle"
29820 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
29821 You can only number displayed formulas.
29824 \begin_layout Standard
29825 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line:
29828 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29829 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29831 \begin_inset space ~
29835 \begin_inset space ~
29843 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
29846 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
29847 \begin_inset Formula
29850 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
29856 To number all lines use the shortcut
29859 arg "math-number-toggle"
29865 \begin_layout Standard
29866 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29869 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
29870 A label is inserted with the menu
29872 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29881 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
29882 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
29883 It is recommended that you use the suggested
29884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29895 as the first part of the label,
29896 because this helps later to identify the label type when you have many labels in your document.
29897 We inserted in the following example the label
29898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29905 in the second line:
29906 \begin_inset Formula
29908 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
29909 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
29914 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
29915 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
29916 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
29918 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29920 \begin_inset space ~
29928 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29932 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
29933 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29934 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output as the formula number:
29937 \begin_layout Standard
29938 This is a cross-reference to equation (
29939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29941 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29949 \begin_layout Standard
29950 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
29951 's cross-reference box are described in section
29952 \begin_inset space ~
29956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29958 reference "sec:Cross-References"
29965 set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and press
29972 \begin_layout Section
29973 User defined math macros
29974 \begin_inset Index idx
29979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29981 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29998 \begin_layout Standard
30000 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you have equations of the same form in a document several times.
30001 Math macros are explained in section
30004 \begin_inset space ~
30016 \begin_layout Section
30020 \begin_layout Subsection
30022 \begin_inset Index idx
30027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30029 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30046 \begin_layout Standard
30047 The standard font for text is italic,
30048 for numbers the standard is roman.
30049 To set a font in a formula,
30053 \begin_inset space ~
30061 arg "math-insert \\font"
30065 or enter its command,
30067 \begin_inset space ~
30071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30073 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
30082 \begin_layout Standard
30083 \begin_inset Float table
30090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30091 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30094 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30096 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
30100 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
30108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30110 \begin_inset Tabular
30111 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
30112 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30113 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30114 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30146 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
30154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30173 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
30181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30200 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
30208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30233 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
30241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30260 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
30268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30287 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
30295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30314 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
30322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30348 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
30356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30382 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
30390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30409 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
30417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30443 \begin_layout Standard
30444 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30453 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
30475 \begin_layout Standard
30476 When you use a typeface,
30477 a blue box is inserted in the formula.
30478 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
30483 within the box will set the cursor outside,
30484 so that you have to use a non-breaking space when you need a space in the box.
30485 Here is an example where
30486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30497 denotes the set of numbers:
30498 \begin_inset Formula
30500 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
30508 \begin_layout Standard
30509 The typefaces are nestable,
30510 which can cause confusion.
30523 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
30527 \begin_inset Newline newline
30530 So it is better not to use this feature.
30533 \begin_layout Standard
30534 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
30536 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
30540 \begin_inset Newline newline
30543 You can only print them emboldened using the command
30550 which works like the other typeface commands:
30552 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
30558 \begin_layout Standard
30565 works for all symbols,
30570 \begin_layout Standard
30571 A number of other font options are available as well,
30574 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30575 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30577 \begin_inset space ~
30585 \begin_layout Subsection
30587 \begin_inset Index idx
30592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30594 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30611 \begin_layout Standard
30612 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font,
30614 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text,
30615 which is obtained using the entry
30618 \begin_inset space ~
30622 \begin_inset space ~
30630 \begin_inset space ~
30638 arg "math-insert \\font"
30642 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30643 in black instead of blue.
30644 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
30645 Here is an example:
30646 \begin_inset Formula
30649 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
30650 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
30659 \begin_layout Subsection
30661 \begin_inset Index idx
30666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30668 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30685 \begin_layout Standard
30686 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode,
30687 which are automatically chosen in most situations.
30708 For most characters,
30717 are actually the same size,
30719 superscripts and subscripts,
30720 and certain other structures,
30726 Except for some operators,
30727 which resize themselves to accommodate various situations,
30728 all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
30729 thinks are appropriate.
30730 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
30733 arg "math-insert \\style"
30737 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
30740 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
30744 which is normally in
30755 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
30759 The four styles are used in the following example:
30762 \begin_layout Standard
30763 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
30768 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
30773 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
30778 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
30784 \begin_layout Standard
30785 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset is set in a particular size with the menu
30787 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30789 \begin_inset space ~
30795 all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
30797 if the base font size of the document is changed,
30798 all fonts will be adjusted to correspond.
30799 As an example here is a formula in the font size
30800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30810 \begin_layout Standard
30814 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
30820 \begin_layout Section
30821 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
30823 \begin_inset Index idx
30828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30835 \begin_inset Index idx
30840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30842 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30859 \begin_layout Standard
30861 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS) that are in common use.
30864 \begin_layout Subsection
30865 Enabling AMS-Support
30868 \begin_layout Standard
30869 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in the document by setting
30883 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30887 \begin_inset Index idx
30892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30894 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30911 \begin_inset space ~
30917 AMS is needed for many math-constructs;
30918 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30919 -errors in formulas,
30920 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
30923 \begin_layout Subsection
30925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30927 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
30932 \begin_inset Index idx
30937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30939 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30943 Multi-line Equations
30956 \begin_layout Standard
30957 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
30958 provides a selection of different formula types.
30960 allows you to choose between
30985 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
30987 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30995 for an explanation of these formula types.
30998 \begin_layout Chapter
31002 \begin_layout Section
31004 \begin_inset Index idx
31009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31018 name "sec:Cross-References"
31025 \begin_layout Standard
31026 One of \SpecialChar LyX
31027 's strengths is cross-references.
31028 You can reference every section,
31032 and list in the document.
31033 To reference a document part,
31034 you have to insert a label into it.
31035 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
31036 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
31039 \begin_layout Enumerate
31043 \begin_layout Enumerate
31044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31046 name "enu:Second-item"
31053 \begin_layout Enumerate
31057 \begin_layout Standard
31058 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
31060 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31063 or by pressing the toolbar button
31070 A gray label box like this:
31072 \begin_inset Graphics
31073 filename clipart/label.png
31077 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
31079 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix,
31080 in our case the text
31081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31114 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted;
31116 if you insert a label into a section heading,
31117 the suggested prefix will be
31118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31132 \begin_layout Standard
31133 To reference the item,
31134 we refer to its label using the menu
31136 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31139 or the toolbar button
31142 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
31146 A gray cross-reference box like this:
31148 \begin_inset Graphics
31149 filename clipart/reference.png
31153 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels in the document.
31154 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
31155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31167 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear in the output.
31170 \begin_layout Standard
31171 As an alternative to
31173 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31177 you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
31182 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted to the actual cursor position via the menu
31184 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31196 \begin_layout Standard
31197 Here is our cross-reference:
31199 \begin_inset space ~
31203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31205 reference "enu:Second-item"
31213 \begin_layout Standard
31214 It is recommended to use a non-breaking space
31218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31219 described in section
31220 \begin_inset space ~
31224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31226 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
31236 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly line breaks between them.
31239 \begin_layout Standard
31240 There are eight formats of cross-references:
31243 \begin_layout Description
31246 this is the default:
31248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31250 reference "fig:Two-images"
31258 \begin_layout Description
31260 prints the number within two parentheses,
31261 this is the style normally used to reference formulas,
31262 especially when the reference name
31263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31274 reference "eq:tanhExp"
31282 \begin_layout Description
31284 prints the page number:
31286 \begin_inset space ~
31290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31291 LatexCommand pageref
31292 reference "fig:Two-images"
31300 \begin_layout Description
31302 \begin_inset space ~
31306 \begin_inset space ~
31310 prints the text “on page” and the page number:
31312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31313 LatexCommand vpageref
31314 reference "fig:Two-images"
31320 \begin_inset Newline newline
31323 If the label is on the same page,
31324 it prints “on this page”;
31325 if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document,
31326 it prints “on the facing page”;
31327 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page,
31328 it prints “on the previous page”;
31329 if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
31330 it prints “on the next page”.
31331 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
31334 \begin_layout Description
31336 \begin_inset space ~
31340 \begin_inset space ~
31344 \begin_inset space ~
31349 the text “on page” and the page number:
31351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31353 reference "fig:Two-images"
31359 \begin_inset Newline newline
31362 If the label is on the same page,
31363 this format behaves like
31370 otherwise it behaves like
31374 \begin_inset space ~
31378 \begin_inset space ~
31387 \begin_layout Description
31389 \begin_inset space ~
31393 prints a self defined cross-reference format.
31394 \begin_inset Newline newline
31398 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31407 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31417 \begin_inset Index idx
31422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31425 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31440 \begin_inset Index idx
31445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31448 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31468 \begin_inset Newline newline
31471 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
31472 -package should be used for this feature by setting the option
31474 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
31478 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31479 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31487 is the default and preferred because
31491 supports only English documents.
31492 The format is specified by using the command
31496 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
31505 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31506 preamble of the document.
31507 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
31508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31524 \begin_inset Newline newline
31531 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
31536 \begin_inset Newline newline
31547 predefines reference formats for all available types.
31548 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem' environments.
31549 So if you want to make formatted references to,
31552 then you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
31558 you might do so as follows:
31559 \begin_inset Newline newline
31566 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
31567 format{prop}{Proposition
31572 \begin_inset Newline newline
31575 For more information about defining formatted references,
31576 have a look at the package documentation
31577 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31579 key "prettyref,refstyle"
31585 \begin_inset Newline newline
31596 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
31601 \begin_inset Newline newline
31604 If you activate the option
31606 Format cross-references in work area
31610 will attempt to display the formatted reference as it would appear in output,
31613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31621 rather than just displaying the label.
31624 \begin_layout Description
31626 \begin_inset space ~
31630 prints the caption or the name of the reference:
31632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31633 LatexCommand nameref
31634 reference "fig:Two-images"
31642 \begin_layout Description
31644 \begin_inset space ~
31648 prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31649 label for the reference:
31651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31652 LatexCommand labelonly
31653 reference "fig:Two-images"
31659 \begin_inset Newline newline
31662 This allows for customization,
31663 using \SpecialChar TeX
31665 if you want to issue a command that \SpecialChar LyX
31672 then you may want to use the
31675 \begin_inset space ~
31681 which will output only the part of the reference following the
31682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31690 This is the form needed for e.
31691 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31695 \begin_inset space \space{}
31702 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31704 The varieties are adjusted in the field
31708 of the cross-reference window,
31709 that appears when you click on the cross-reference.
31712 \begin_layout Standard
31713 You can only use the style
31717 to reference numbered document parts,
31718 while the reference style
31722 is always possible.
31725 \begin_layout Standard
31726 If you want to reference a section,
31727 put the label in the section heading;
31728 for floats put the label in the caption;
31729 for footnotes put the label in it.
31730 Referencing formulas is explained in section
31731 \begin_inset space ~
31735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31737 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
31745 \begin_layout Standard
31746 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
31750 \begin_inset space ~
31754 \begin_inset space ~
31759 sets the cursor before the referenced label (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding label).
31760 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
31763 \begin_inset space ~
31768 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
31769 You can also go back with the toolbar button
31772 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
31779 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
31780 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
31786 \begin_layout Standard
31787 You can change labels at any time.
31788 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you do not need to change them all manually.
31791 \begin_layout Standard
31792 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label,
31793 you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
31794 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead of the reference.
31797 \begin_layout Standard
31798 References are described in detail in the section
31809 \begin_layout Section
31810 Table of Contents and other Listings
31811 \begin_inset Index idx
31816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31823 \begin_inset Index idx
31828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31830 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31845 \begin_inset Index idx
31850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31866 \begin_layout Subsection
31868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31870 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
31877 \begin_layout Standard
31878 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
31880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31881 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31883 \begin_inset space ~
31887 \begin_inset space ~
31893 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
31895 If you click on it,
31901 showing you the TOC entries as outline,
31902 which allows you to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
31903 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
31905 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
31907 \begin_inset space ~
31912 that is described in section
31913 \begin_inset space ~
31917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31919 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
31927 \begin_layout Standard
31928 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
31929 If you have declared a short title for a section heading,
31930 as described in section
31931 \begin_inset space ~
31935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31937 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
31943 it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
31945 \begin_inset space ~
31949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31951 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
31956 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are listed in the TOC.
31957 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
31960 \begin_layout Subsection
31963 Listings and Algorithms
31964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31966 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
31973 \begin_layout Standard
31976 listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
31977 You can insert them via the
31979 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31980 List/Contents/References
31983 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
31986 \begin_layout Section
31987 URLs and Hyperlinks
31988 \begin_inset Index idx
31993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32000 \begin_inset Index idx
32005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32014 \begin_layout Subsection
32016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32025 \begin_layout Standard
32026 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
32028 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32034 \begin_layout Standard
32035 Here is an example URL:
32039 \begin_inset Flex URL
32042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32044 https://www.lyx.org
32052 \begin_layout Standard
32054 the URL text will always be in the style
32059 You can globally change the formatting by putting to
32061 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32062 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32068 \begin_layout LyX-Code
32074 \begin_layout Standard
32098 (use whatever the current text font is).
32099 To have italicized URLs,
32103 \begin_layout LyX-Code
32115 \begin_layout Standard
32116 URLs will break between lines at certain characters,
32120 \begin_layout LyX-Code
32131 \begin_layout Standard
32132 It does not break at a hyphen (
32137 but you can change that by adding
32143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32144 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32145 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
32146 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
32150 If this still does not break URLs suitably to you,
32151 a last resort is to put
32159 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32160 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32164 this will cause URLs to be broken at every character.
32167 \begin_layout Standard
32168 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32177 URLs must not end with a backslash,
32178 otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
32187 \begin_layout Subsection
32189 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32191 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
32198 \begin_layout Standard
32199 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
32201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32204 or with the toolbar button
32211 The appearing dialog has two fields:
32221 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
32222 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
32224 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32226 name "LyX's homepage"
32227 target "https://www.lyx.org"
32233 an Email address like this:
32235 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32237 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
32238 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
32245 a link to a file or any other valid URI (such as
32254 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32262 \begin_layout Standard
32263 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by adding the prefix
32264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32275 to the link target,
32276 but note that most PDF viewers disable such links for security reasons.
32279 \begin_layout Standard
32280 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
32281 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
32282 To set the format of the link text,
32283 highlight the hyperlink inset and use the text style dialog.
32284 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
32289 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32291 name "LyX's homepage"
32292 target "https://www.lyx.org"
32300 \begin_layout Standard
32301 The link text color can be changed,
32306 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
32308 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32309 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32313 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the option
32314 \begin_inset Newline newline
32322 \begin_inset Newline newline
32329 in the PDF Properties dialog.
32332 \begin_layout Standard
32333 To open the link while editing in \SpecialChar LyX
32334 you can use context menu (or directly via
32336 Ctrl + right mouse button
32341 \begin_layout Section
32343 \begin_inset Index idx
32348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32357 name "sec:Counters"
32364 \begin_layout Standard
32365 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32366 is its ability to manage counters.
32368 this is handled automatically,
32369 but there are times one wants to modify counters directly.
32370 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
32371 using the counter inset,
32372 which is accessible from the Edit menu.
32373 This allows one to set a counter's value;
32374 to reset it (to zero);
32378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32379 Note that the section counter,
32381 starts with its value at zero and then is incremented to one when the first section is created.
32383 if you want the next section to be section five,
32385 then you need to set the section counter to four.
32390 to add to the value (or subtract from it,
32391 since the value added can be negative);
32393 to restore the saved value;
32394 and to print the value.
32395 These effects can also be limited to \SpecialChar LyX
32397 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output,
32398 as well as in \SpecialChar LaTeX
32402 \begin_layout Standard
32403 There are five commands you can use:
32406 \begin_layout Enumerate
32412 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
32415 \begin_layout Enumerate
32421 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract,
32422 if you choose a negative number)
32425 \begin_layout Enumerate
32431 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
32434 \begin_layout Enumerate
32437 Save value of counter:
32440 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
32443 \begin_layout Enumerate
32446 Restore value of counter:
32449 Restores the previously saved value.
32452 \begin_layout Standard
32453 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all those that are available in the current document class.
32456 \begin_layout Section
32458 \begin_inset Index idx
32463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32472 name "sec:Appendices"
32479 \begin_layout Standard
32480 Appendices are created with the menu
32482 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32484 \begin_inset space ~
32488 \begin_inset space ~
32494 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end as the appendix part of the book.
32495 This part is marked with a red borderline.
32498 \begin_layout Standard
32499 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
32500 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
32501 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot and the subsection number.
32502 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
32506 \begin_layout Standard
32508 \begin_inset space ~
32512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32514 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
32524 \begin_inset space ~
32528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32530 reference "subsec:Export"
32538 \begin_layout Section
32540 \begin_inset Index idx
32545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32554 name "sec:Bibliography"
32561 \begin_layout Standard
32562 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
32564 You can include a bibliography database,
32565 which is explained in sec.
32566 \begin_inset space ~
32570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32572 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32581 or you can insert the bibliography manually,
32582 using the paragraph environment
32587 which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
32588 \begin_inset space ~
32592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32594 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
32600 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in this document,
32601 such as author-year citations,
32602 and if you have more than a handful of references,
32603 then you should seriously consider
32607 using a bibliography database.
32610 \begin_layout Standard
32611 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches,
32612 we use two bibliographies in this document,
32617 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
32619 the bibliography that is created from a database lists only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
32621 the database approach relieves you,
32622 amongst other things,
32623 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
32626 \begin_layout Subsection
32627 The Bibliography Environment
32628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32630 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32637 \begin_layout Standard
32643 every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled with a number.
32644 If you click on it,
32645 you will get a dialog in which you can set a
32654 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography entry.
32655 Each entry needs to be given a unique key,
32656 which is one word consisting of ASCII characters only.
32660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32662 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32665 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
32671 \begin_inset Newline newline
32675 \begin_inset Flex URL
32678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32680 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
32691 our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32701 a short form of its title,
32703 \begin_inset Newline newline
32711 references to it will appear with this label instead of the number of the entry.
32716 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32724 \begin_layout Standard
32725 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
32727 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32730 or the toolbar button
32733 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
32737 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear containing the available citations.
32738 Select one or more keys from the list and
32748 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
32749 If you click on the box,
32750 the citation window will appear and you can change the reference.
32753 \begin_layout Standard
32754 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
32755 Here are two examples;
32756 the first without a label,
32757 the second with the label
32758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32768 \begin_layout Standard
32772 Companion Second Edition
32776 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32778 key "latexcompanion"
32786 \begin_layout Standard
32787 The \SpecialChar LyX
32788 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
32790 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32800 \begin_layout Standard
32801 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations,
32802 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32808 \begin_inset Index idx
32813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32816 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32835 \begin_inset space ~
32840 in the document settings
32841 \begin_inset Index idx
32846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32848 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32864 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
32866 \begin_inset space ~
32872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32874 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
32883 Once you have done that,
32886 Bibliography item settings
32888 dialog has three input fields instead of the
32907 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation reference,
32908 the second the year (without parentheses).
32909 These two are madatory.
32910 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full list (
32916 ) and in abrreviated form (
32921 add the abbreviated form to
32925 and the full list to the optional
32930 If specified like this,
32931 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles in the
32933 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32950 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between full and abbreviated list.
32951 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for the citation references.
32952 In the bibliography entry,
32953 author and year must be added manually.
32956 \begin_layout Standard
32957 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest label via the menu
32959 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32961 \begin_inset space ~
32969 arg "layout-paragraph"
32973 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
32976 \begin_layout Subsection
32977 Bibliography databases
32978 \begin_inset Index idx
32983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32985 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33000 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33002 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
33009 \begin_layout Standard
33010 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different documents.
33014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33015 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning them.
33016 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations and reviews along with bibliographical information.
33021 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography entries.
33022 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of your working field in a database.
33023 This database can be used for different documents,
33024 and by default only the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography list for that document.
33025 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books you have cited.
33028 \begin_layout Standard
33029 The database is a text file with the file extension
33030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33042 containing the bibliography in a special format.
33043 The format is explained in
33044 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33051 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33053 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33055 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
33061 The file can be created using any text editor,
33062 but normally one uses a special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
33063 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
33065 \begin_inset Flex URL
33068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33070 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
33078 \begin_layout Standard
33080 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
33081 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33082 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases for a long time.
33083 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing styles available.
33084 But it has its drawbacks,
33085 especially when it comes to more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
33086 Those are addressed by
33091 \begin_inset Index idx
33096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33099 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33114 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33115 (although it has been significantly extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33126 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33128 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33129 might conversely fail to correctly handle databases that use specific
33139 but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references from it.
33142 \begin_layout Standard
33143 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33149 set in the document settings (menu
33151 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33155 \begin_inset Index idx
33160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33162 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33183 \begin_inset space ~
33188 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33196 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33197 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33199 \begin_inset Index idx
33204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33206 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33210 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33224 \begin_layout Standard
33225 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33229 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33230 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33232 \begin_inset space ~
33238 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33246 Add bibliography to TOC
33248 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
33253 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database in the document or just the cited references.
33258 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s),
33259 should this differ from the encoding of the document.
33262 \begin_layout Standard
33263 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33264 style file is a text file with the file extension
33265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33276 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
33277 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33278 distribution should provide several of these,
33279 and many publishers provide their own style files,
33280 so that you don't have to take care of the layout.
33281 It is of course possible to write your own style file,
33282 but this is something for experts.
33286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33287 For information on how this is done,
33289 \begin_inset Newline newline
33293 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33295 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
33305 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33311 which provides an alpha-numeric style.
33314 \begin_layout Standard
33315 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
33318 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33320 \begin_inset Index idx
33325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33327 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33342 \begin_inset Index idx
33347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33350 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33367 \begin_layout Standard
33368 Accessing a database via
33372 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33376 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33377 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33379 \begin_inset space ~
33385 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33386 you cannot select a
33390 file at this place.
33391 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33394 note the following.
33397 \begin_layout Standard
33402 has two different style files:
33403 a bibliography style file (text file with the file extension
33404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33415 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style file (text file with the file extension
33416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33427 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
33428 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching styles.
33429 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography style.
33432 \begin_layout Standard
33437 styles are not set in the
33440 \begin_inset space ~
33446 but in the document settings.
33447 \begin_inset Index idx
33452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33454 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33469 in the dialog in the
33474 which is only visible if you use
33479 you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for example how its heading will appear).
33480 These options are described in detail in the
33486 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33496 \begin_layout Standard
33497 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
33498 \begin_inset space ~
33502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33504 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
33515 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33516 Bibliography Processors
33519 \begin_layout Standard
33520 To generate the bibliography from a database,
33522 uses a bibliography processor,
33523 that is an external program that reads the database,
33524 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
33525 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33527 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread,
33528 but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations,
33532 \begin_layout Standard
33534 some alternatives have been developed that address some of these limitations.
33535 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
33536 You can do this on a general level in
33538 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33539 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33540 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
33543 or for individual documents in
33545 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33546 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33550 The following variants are available by default:
33553 \begin_layout Description
33556 \begin_inset Index idx
33561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33564 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33578 developed exclusively for
33582 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33588 provides full Unicode support,
33589 unlimited memory and many specific features
33599 it is strongly recommended to use
33606 \begin_layout Description
33607 bibtex the standard;
33608 does not allow special characters in bibliography entries that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding,
33610 works with all bibliography packages,
33611 although it will probably fail with
33615 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
33618 \begin_layout Description
33619 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding (but no Unicode support),
33625 works with all bibliography packages,
33626 although more complex
33630 bibliographies will exceed its limits,
33635 features are supported.
33638 \begin_layout Standard
33639 By default (with the
33645 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33646 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33659 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33660 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33661 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
33666 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography approach (
33679 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33680 -based bibliography styles).
33681 This should suit most needs.
33684 \begin_layout Standard
33685 In Japanese documents,
33686 a specific processor is used.
33687 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
33688 (in \SpecialChar LyX
33694 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33695 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
33696 You can adjust it in
33698 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33699 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33700 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
33706 \begin_layout Standard
33707 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you can add below the selection.
33708 Before adding options,
33709 it is strongly recommended that you read the manual of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33716 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33726 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33730 \begin_layout Standard
33732 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple bibliographies.
33733 These are explained in detail in section
33735 Customizing Bibliographies
33739 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33744 Additional Features
33746 manual.Citation Format
33747 \begin_inset Index idx
33752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33754 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33771 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
33778 \begin_layout Standard
33779 Many different citation formats are common,
33781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33785 \begin_inset space \space{}
33788 numerical citation (as
33789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33796 like in this document),
33797 alpha-numerical citations (as
33798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33805 ) or author-year citations (as
33806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33815 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style files.
33818 \begin_layout Standard
33819 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
33822 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33823 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33827 \begin_inset Index idx
33832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33834 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33848 you have a range of other options,
33849 depending on your preferred bibliography approach.
33854 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography labels,
33858 \begin_inset space ~
33869 \begin_inset space ~
33874 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
33875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33877 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
33885 \begin_layout Standard
33886 With a bibliography database (see
33887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33889 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
33897 ) one has in contrary to the
33901 environment full access to the formatting styles.
33902 These style formats are available:
33905 \begin_layout Description
33907 \begin_inset space ~
33910 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33911 -based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric citations).
33914 \begin_layout Description
33915 Biblatex loads the package
33920 \begin_inset Index idx
33925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33928 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33942 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
33944 Biblatex citation style
33948 Biblatex bibliography style
33951 Options to the package
33955 can be entered in the
33962 \begin_layout Description
33964 \begin_inset space ~
33968 \begin_inset space ~
33971 mode) loads the package
33975 with the natbib compatibility mode.
33976 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that uses
33987 behavior very closely.
33992 this option has some additional styles.
33997 styles are also supported by this variant.
34000 \begin_layout Description
34002 \begin_inset space ~
34005 (BibTeX) loads the package
34010 \begin_inset Index idx
34015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34018 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34032 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
34035 \begin_layout Description
34037 \begin_inset space ~
34040 (BibTeX) loads the package
34045 \begin_inset Index idx
34050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34053 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34067 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
34070 \begin_layout Standard
34079 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical citation styles.
34080 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
34090 this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
34092 Whether the output uses numerical,
34093 author-year or another format such as alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
34095 Biblatex citation style
34099 when switching between Author-year and Author-number,
34100 a suitable style is proposed.
34107 the dialog selection will ultimately determine the style.
34110 \begin_layout Standard
34111 For any author-year and author-numerical selection,
34112 multiple style variants are available in the
34117 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase a name prefix such as
34118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34133 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
34134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34138 \begin_inset space \space{}
34142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34153 \begin_layout Standard
34154 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation reference,
34156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34160 \begin_inset space \space{}
34164 which will then be formatted according to the style's needs (e.
34165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34169 \begin_inset space \space{}
34173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34185 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
34189 \begin_inset space ~
34197 \begin_inset space ~
34203 Here is a simple example where the text
34204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34208 \begin_inset space ~
34212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34215 appears after the reference:
34218 \begin_layout Quote
34220 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34223 key "latexcompanion"
34231 \begin_layout Standard
34232 All styles except for
34236 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such as
34237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34245 This text is then also included in the parentheses,
34246 if the style requires this.
34249 \begin_layout Standard
34250 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
34251 So if you refer to multiple references at once,
34252 the prenote will precede the first citation in the list,
34253 the postnote will follow the last.
34258 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a multi-citation (so-called
34259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34262 qualified citation lists
34263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34269 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple items the
34273 dialog will display three columns in the field
34281 \begin_inset space ~
34290 \begin_inset space ~
34298 \begin_inset space ~
34304 If you double-click on an item's
34307 \begin_inset space ~
34315 \begin_inset space ~
34321 you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
34324 General text before
34330 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
34333 \begin_layout Subsection
34334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34336 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
34340 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
34344 \begin_layout Standard
34346 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
34349 \begin_inset space ~
34353 \begin_inset space ~
34357 \begin_inset space ~
34361 \begin_inset space ~
34364 Content\SpecialChar ldots
34367 context menu if specific conditions are met:
34370 \begin_layout Itemize
34371 If citation entries include any of the fields
34372 \begin_inset Flex Code
34375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34382 \begin_inset Flex Code
34385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34391 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
34393 \begin_inset Flex Code
34396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34402 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv,
34407 \begin_inset Flex Code
34410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34417 the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
34420 \begin_layout Itemize
34421 If citation entries include any of the fields
34422 \begin_inset Flex Code
34425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34431 (filled by JabRef and Zotero) or
34432 \begin_inset Flex Code
34435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34441 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local drive,
34442 the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
34443 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
34446 \begin_layout Standard
34447 In addition to that,
34453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34454 By default we provide python script
34455 \begin_inset Flex Code
34458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34465 but you can use any modified script by setting
34466 \begin_inset Flex Code
34469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34472 citation_search_view
34477 variable in the file
34481 in your local configuration directory (please refer to the respective section at
34483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
34487 The default setting is to be found in the file
34491 in the same directory and can be copied and modified for this purpose.
34496 your disk for matching files if you enable
34498 Search drive for cited files
34502 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34503 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
34504 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34509 It uses the tokens supplied at
34513 in the same preferences section (by default:
34518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34519 Provided by token sequence
34520 \begin_inset Flex Code
34523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34524 %year% %abbrvciteauthor%
34530 Note that some constituents (
34531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34548 commas) are automatically stripped from the result.
34554 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the name of the file (at arbitrary position).
34556 opens the first matching file it finds.
34557 This might or might not be the file you are looking for;
34558 the more systematic your file naming is,
34559 and the less ambiguous keywords you use,
34560 the greater the chance this works for you.
34563 \begin_layout Standard
34564 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
34565 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34567 \begin_inset Flex Code
34570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34577 \begin_inset Flex Code
34580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34587 but there are also special keys,
34588 which are documented in the
34590 Customization manual
34596 Cite format description
34601 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34602 Security implications
34605 \begin_layout Standard
34606 Note that any document (or mainly
34607 \begin_inset Flex Code
34610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34616 file in this case) coming from a third party might contain malicious links or otherwise malformed URLs and we suggest you do not use this feature for other documents than those you prepared yourself.
34619 \begin_layout Standard
34620 For that reason the searching on disk is disabled by default and you will be asked for confirmation of viewing all the links (both can be bypassed,
34621 but beware what you are doing).
34624 \begin_layout Section
34626 \begin_inset Index idx
34631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34647 \begin_layout Standard
34648 An index entry is created if you use the menu
34650 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34652 \begin_inset space ~
34657 or the toolbar button
34664 \begin_inset space ~
34668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34670 reference "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
34675 for some advanced methods).
34676 A collapsible inset with green label is inserted;
34677 this holds the text that appears in the index (if you read this in \SpecialChar LyX
34680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34687 index inset in the heading above for example).
34688 The word where the cursor is in,
34689 or the currently highlighted text,
34690 is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
34692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34696 copied into the inset).
34699 \begin_layout Standard
34700 The index list (which prints out the index in your document) is inserted via the menu
34702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34703 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34705 \begin_inset space ~
34711 A light blue box labeled
34712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34723 will show the place where the index will be printed.
34725 the index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
34727 as there are no settings to make.
34728 This changes if you select
34729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34732 Use multiple indexes
34733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34737 \begin_inset space ~
34741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34743 reference "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
34753 the box turns gray and can be clicked (as there are now settings that can be made).
34756 \begin_layout Standard
34758 an index entry is simply a word or phrase in the (alphabetically ordered) index list with a reference to the page or pages where the index entry has been inserted in the document.
34760 you can customize index entries to look different.
34761 You can group index entries hierarchically,
34762 let the index list refer to a range of pages rather than a single page,
34763 let it refer to another entry in the index list rather than,
34764 or additionally to,
34766 you can format the page reference (e.
34767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34771 make it bold for specific pages),
34772 and you can determine the order of an entry in the list.
34773 These features are available in \SpecialChar LyX
34775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34784 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34787 that appears if the cursor is in an index entry or via the index settings dialog which can be opened via right mouse click on the index inset.
34790 \begin_layout Standard
34791 We describe these features in turn in the next subsections.
34792 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34793 's index mechanism,
34794 have a look at one of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34796 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34798 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
34806 \begin_layout Subsection
34807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34809 name "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
34813 Grouping Index Entries
34814 \begin_inset Index idx
34819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34821 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34838 \begin_layout Standard
34839 Index entries are often hierarchically grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index and to hold categories together (e.g.,
34845 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34852 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34859 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
34862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34863 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
34873 Both methods insert a subinset in which you can enter the subentry.
34874 Maximally two such subentry insets,
34876 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34880 three levels of grouping in total,
34881 are allowed per index entry.
34882 Note that it does not matter where you insert these subentry insets in the index inset,
34883 but the order of them matters and determines the grouping hierarchy.
34884 In the \SpecialChar LyX
34886 the index entry in the header above shows an example for a two-level grouped entry (and you can see the result in the index of this document at the entry
34891 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34900 \begin_layout Standard
34902 each subentry is on a new line and indented a bit more.
34903 Note that the higher levels only get their own page references if they have also a separate entry (without subentry).
34906 \begin_layout Standard
34907 Note also that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
34909 subentries are indicated by a preceding exclamation mark character
34910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34918 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
34920 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
34922 a real exclamation mark has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
34924 \begin_inset space ~
34928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34930 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
34939 \begin_layout Subsection
34941 \begin_inset Index idx
34946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34948 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34965 \begin_layout Standard
34967 an index entry refers to single pages where the index entries have been inserted.
34968 If you want to refer to a page range instead,
34969 you can do this by inserting two index entries:
34970 one that marks the beginning of the range,
34971 the other that marks its end.
34972 Both need to contain the same index entry (and possibly subentries) text.
34973 To mark start and end,
34974 select the respective
34978 option in the index inset settings dialog.
34979 Range starts and ends are indicated in the index inset label via
34980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34998 \begin_layout Standard
34999 Note that you have to take care that range markers are complete.
35000 If a range start without a respective end (or vice versa) is found,
35001 the index processor might terminate and not produce an index without informing you about the reason.
35004 \begin_layout Subsection
35006 \begin_inset Index idx
35011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35013 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35030 \begin_layout Standard
35031 It is also possible to refer to another index entry rather than,
35034 This might be useful if you anticipate that your readers might look for an entry at different places,
35036 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35048 (which could be resolved by a cross reference
35049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35061 ) or also if you use hierarchical grouping (section
35062 \begin_inset space ~
35066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35068 reference "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
35075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35090 \begin_layout Standard
35091 This is possible in \SpecialChar LyX
35094 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35095 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35101 \begin_layout Standard
35102 If you want a cross-reference and page references,
35105 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35106 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35118 instead and makes more sense if you also add entries that are referred to by page number as in
35119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35137 \begin_layout Subsection
35138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35140 name "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
35145 \begin_inset Index idx
35150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35152 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35169 \begin_layout Standard
35170 Sometimes the automatic ordering of index entries is not the one you want.
35171 This might be the case with some index processors (such as
35175 ) if you use accented characters in the index entry or if you use macros.
35178 \begin_layout Standard
35179 To accommodate for that,
35182 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35183 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35187 The sortkey you enter here is not output in the index,
35188 it is just used for sorting (instead of the actual entry).
35190 you can pass the sort key
35191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35202 should your index processor be incapable to sort Slovenian postmodern philosophers correctly.
35205 \begin_layout Standard
35206 Note that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35208 sortkeys are separated from the actual entry by the character
35209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35217 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
35219 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
35221 a real @ character has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
35223 \begin_inset space ~
35227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35229 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
35237 \begin_layout Subsection
35238 Index Entry Formatting
35239 \begin_inset Index idx
35244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35246 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35263 \begin_layout Standard
35264 The appearance of index entries can be formatted as usual via the text style dialog,
35265 the toolbar or shortcuts.
35266 Entries will appear in the index list in the way they are formatted in the index entry.
35267 \begin_inset Index idx
35272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35274 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35280 This is an italic dummy entry
35290 Note that this also means that two differently formatted otherwise identical entries,
35292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35305 will be listed separately.
35309 \begin_layout Standard
35310 To format a page reference,
35315 option in the index entry settings dialog.
35316 You can either select one of the proposed formatting options (
35336 you are supposed to enter a valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
35343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35347 a self-defined command
35348 \begin_inset Flex Code
35351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35357 or an existing macro such as
35358 \begin_inset Flex Code
35361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35370 \begin_layout Standard
35372 we encourage you to use self-defined commands.
35373 This makes it easier to change the formatting,
35374 should you or your publisher decide to do that later.
35376 add a formatting macro for index entries that refer to the page(s) where the indexed term is defined by putting the following in the preamble
35379 \begin_layout Standard
35391 \begin_layout Standard
35392 and add the custom formatting
35393 \begin_inset Flex Code
35396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35402 to the respective entry settings dialog.
35405 \begin_layout Standard
35406 This will cause all page references that use this custom format to be printed in italics.
35407 If you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions must not be italic but bold,
35408 you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
35409 not every single index entry.
35412 \begin_layout Standard
35413 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35422 If you use the index processor
35428 makeindex or xindex
35431 \begin_inset space ~
35435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35437 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
35443 such custom macros do not work out of the box.
35448 requires you to define semantic elements in the xindy
35449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35456 (style file) you use before they can be used.
35458 this would require to add the following line in the module file:
35461 \begin_layout Verbatim
35463 (markup-locref :open "
35465 IndexDef{" :close "}" :attr "IndexDef")
35468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35470 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35473 key "latexcompanion"
35486 \begin_layout Standard
35487 You can also change the layout of the whole index.
35489 if you mark the index list box as bold,
35490 you will get a bold font for all index entries.
35493 it is better (and required for more advanced tasks) to set up a so-called
35518 ) to determine the formatting;
35519 please refer to the
35532 documentations for details,
35534 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35536 key "makeindex,xindex,xindy"
35542 There are also some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35543 packages available that ease such formatting,
35545 \begin_inset Flex URL
35548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35550 https://ctan.org/topic/index
35558 \begin_layout Subsection
35559 Special Characters in Index Entries
35560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35562 name "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
35569 \begin_layout Standard
35570 As already mentioned above,
35571 some characters have a special meaning in index entries,
35574 \begin_inset Flex Code
35577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35585 \begin_inset Flex Code
35588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35596 \begin_inset Flex Code
35599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35600 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35610 \begin_inset Flex Code
35613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35620 If you use them literally,
35621 you might get surprising results or even a non-working index.
35623 you will not get the character itself.
35626 \begin_layout Standard
35627 In order to use these characters in inset entries,
35629 \begin_inset Quotes els
35633 \begin_inset Quotes ers
35637 that is prepended by a character that tells the index processor to treat this character without its special meaning.
35639 the escape character is
35640 \begin_inset Flex Code
35643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35644 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35652 (but this can be changed).
35654 \begin_inset Flex Code
35657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35658 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35668 \begin_inset Flex Code
35671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35672 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35682 \begin_inset Flex Code
35685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35686 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35690 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
35700 \begin_inset Flex Code
35703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35704 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35712 to get the special character you want.
35713 Note that the escape character,
35715 \begin_inset Flex Code
35718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35719 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35732 be inserted in a TeX code box (see section
35733 \begin_inset space ~
35737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35739 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35747 \begin_layout Subsection
35748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35750 name "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
35754 Convenience Functions for Index Handling
35757 \begin_layout Standard
35758 Indexing a document can be a tedious task,
35759 since you often have to insert the same index entry multiple times in order to refer to passages at different pages.
35760 This is not only time-consuming,
35761 but also error-prone;
35763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35767 you have to remember how exactly an inset entry has been inserted to avoid redundant entries.
35769 provides some functions to ease the task.
35772 \begin_layout Standard
35774 if you want to add an entry which you already used before,
35775 you can open the outliner via
35777 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
35781 \begin_inset space ~
35785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35787 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
35797 section (it is convenient to have this open while indexing anyway),
35798 scroll to the entry in question (if you check
35803 it will be more easier),
35808 -click on the entry and select
35810 Insert Copy at Cursor Position
35812 from the context menu.
35813 This will do just what it says:
35814 it will insert a copy of that index inset at the position where the cursor is.
35817 \begin_layout Standard
35820 also provides a semi-automated solution to index a word.
35821 If you right-click on an index entry inset,
35822 you can select from the context menu
35824 Index All Occurrences of this Word
35827 This will search the whole document (only single documents,
35828 not master and child documents) and insert a copy of this index inset after each occurrence of the word that precedes the inset.
35829 Note that casing of the word does not matter,
35830 but only full words in the same grammatical form are considered (so if
35834 is the word before the index entry,
35839 will be considered as well,
35845 Please take care to not overuse this function and to carefully check the result afterwards.
35847 a good index does not simply list all occurrences of a given word in a specific document (that is a concordance rather),
35848 but only relevant occurrences!
35849 So as convenient as this function might seem,
35850 it is suitable especially for particular cases.
35852 you will have more work with removing again falsely inserted entries than you would have with manually inserting them at the right place.
35855 \begin_layout Subsection
35857 \begin_inset Index idx
35862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35864 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35881 name "subsec:Index-Program"
35888 \begin_layout Standard
35889 If the index processor,
35902 for that matter) for index generation;
35903 otherwise the program
35908 the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
35911 As a further option,
35912 you can select the rather new
35919 \begin_layout Itemize
35925 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
35926 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
35927 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly (we have shown above,
35929 \begin_inset space ~
35933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35935 reference "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
35941 how to manually fix this sorting,
35942 but this is very tedious work).
35945 \begin_layout Itemize
35946 The alternative program,
35952 is a newer and much more mighty alternative.
35953 It can sort most languages correctly,
35954 and it is also much more customizable in the output.
35960 is no longer actively maintained,
35961 and it has bugs that are most likely not being addressed anytime soon.
35967 is not always available out of the box and quite a challenge to install on some systems (particularly Windows).
35968 But if you have it available,
35969 it is almost always a better option than
35976 \begin_layout Itemize
35983 is a quite new and actively developed index processor.
35984 It is included in modern \SpecialChar TeX
35985 distributions such as \SpecialChar TeX
35986 Live and Mik\SpecialChar TeX
35988 is pretty much customizable and supports many languages.
35989 The program is still in development,
35990 so not everything might work equally well than in the older processors.
35991 But the program is definitely worth a try,
35996 does not work or not satisfy your needs.
35999 \begin_layout Standard
36000 All processors can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
36001 's preferences dialog,
36003 \begin_inset space ~
36007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36009 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
36015 The available options are listed and explained in
36016 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36018 key "makeindex-man,xindex,xindy"
36025 you can even specify arbitrary alternative programs to generate the index.
36028 \begin_layout Standard
36029 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a given document,
36030 you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
36033 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36034 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36038 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
36041 \begin_layout Subsection
36042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36044 name "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
36051 \begin_layout Standard
36052 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
36054 you might need to set up a separate
36055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36062 next to the standard index.
36064 does not provide this possibility out of the box,
36065 but there are packages that add this feature.
36072 \begin_inset Index idx
36077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36080 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36094 package to generate multiple indexes.
36095 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
36100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36101 If yours does not ship it,
36102 consult the \SpecialChar TeX
36105 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36113 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36115 but it also includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
36116 Please consult the package's manual for details.
36124 \begin_layout Standard
36125 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
36126 for the use of multiple indexes,
36129 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36130 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36133 and select the option
36135 Use multiple Indexes
36142 already contains the standard index
36143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36151 To add further indexes,
36152 add the name of the index (in the form that should also appear as a heading) to the
36156 input field and press the
36161 The new index now also appears in the list.
36163 you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
36164 label color to the new index.
36167 \begin_layout Standard
36168 Once the document changes have been applied,
36169 you can find the new index list in
36171 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36172 List/Contents/References
36178 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
36179 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index,
36180 but there are additional features:
36183 \begin_layout Itemize
36184 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry,
36185 right-clicking on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
36188 \begin_layout Itemize
36189 By right-clicking on an index,
36190 you can change its type.
36192 you can specify an index to be a
36198 the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
36200 if you use a book class,
36201 where the standard index heading is defined as a chapter,
36202 subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
36205 \begin_layout Itemize
36210 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
36211 code in the name of the index.
36214 \begin_layout Section
36215 Nomenclature/Glossary
36216 \begin_inset Index idx
36221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36228 \begin_inset Index idx
36233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36235 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
36238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36252 name "sec:Nomenclature"
36259 \begin_layout Standard
36260 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or glossary.
36263 \begin_layout Standard
36264 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries,
36265 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36271 \begin_inset Index idx
36276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36279 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36294 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36297 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36304 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36308 \begin_layout Standard
36309 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry and then use the menu
36311 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36317 \begin_inset space ~
36322 or the toolbar button
36325 arg "nomencl-insert"
36330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36341 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
36344 \begin_layout Standard
36345 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
36346 The first is the term or
36350 that you wish to define.
36355 of the term or symbol.
36358 \begin_layout Standard
36359 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36368 To use \SpecialChar TeX
36369 code for nomenclature entries the option
36373 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
36381 \begin_layout Subsection
36382 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
36383 \begin_inset Index idx
36388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36390 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36407 \begin_layout Standard
36408 If you have symbols in formulas,
36409 you have to define them in the
36413 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
36416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36420 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36429 \begin_inset Newline newline
36437 \begin_inset Newline newline
36443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36450 character starts/ends the formula.
36451 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
36452 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with a backslash
36453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36463 For capital Greek letters,
36464 start the command also with a capital letter,
36474 \begin_layout Standard
36475 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36476 syntax is given in section
36477 \begin_inset space ~
36481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36483 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
36491 \begin_layout Standard
36495 \begin_inset space ~
36500 dialog to format the description text;
36501 you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
36503 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
36504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36508 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36515 in this document is:
36516 \begin_inset Newline newline
36521 dummy entry for the character
36526 \begin_inset Newline newline
36538 \begin_inset space ~
36548 font use the command
36579 \begin_layout Standard
36580 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
36581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36585 \begin_inset space \space{}
36589 \begin_inset Newline newline
36605 \begin_inset Newline newline
36608 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
36609 This command will make the font of all symbols
36616 \begin_inset space ~
36624 \begin_layout Standard
36625 If the characters |
36626 \begin_inset space \space{}
36630 \begin_inset space \space{}
36634 \begin_inset space \space{}
36639 \begin_inset space \space{}
36643 \begin_inset space \space{}
36646 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
36647 code they need to be escaped by adding a percent character in front of them.
36648 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
36649 LatexCommand nomenclature
36650 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
36651 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
36659 \begin_layout Subsection
36660 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
36661 \begin_inset Index idx
36666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36668 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36685 \begin_layout Standard
36686 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36687 -code of the symbol definition.
36688 This leads to undesired results when you,
36690 have symbols in formulas.
36691 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
36694 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
36695 LatexCommand nomenclature
36697 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
36705 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36709 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
36710 LatexCommand nomenclature
36713 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
36719 They will be sorted by
36720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36746 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36749 will be sorted before the
36753 since the character
36754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36761 is considered in sorting.
36764 \begin_layout Standard
36765 To control the sort order,
36769 \begin_inset space ~
36774 field of the nomenclature dialog.
36775 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol definition.
36776 For the example given,
36781 in this field for the
36782 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36790 will be located before
36791 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36797 \begin_layout Standard
36798 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
36804 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36814 \begin_layout Subsection
36815 Nomenclature Options
36816 \begin_inset Index idx
36821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36823 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36840 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
36847 \begin_layout Standard
36852 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
36853 Here are some of its options;
36854 for more have a look at its documentation:
36857 \begin_layout Description
36858 refeq Appends the phrase
36859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36875 to every nomenclature entry,
36882 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
36885 \begin_layout Description
36886 refpage Appends the phrase
36887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36903 to every nomenclature entry,
36910 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
36913 \begin_layout Description
36914 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
36917 \begin_layout Standard
36918 To use one or more of the options,
36919 add them to the comma-separated document class options list in the
36921 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36925 In this document the options
36933 \begin_layout Standard
36934 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
36940 \begin_layout Standard
36941 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
36945 field in the nomenclature dialog:
36948 \begin_layout Description
36958 \begin_layout Description
36961 nomrefpage Like the
36968 \begin_layout Description
36971 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
36980 \begin_layout Description
36984 \begin_inset space ~
36990 \begin_inset space ~
36995 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
36998 \begin_layout Standard
37000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37007 are automatically translated for most document languages.
37009 add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
37013 \begin_layout Standard
37022 \begin_inset Newline newline
37028 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37032 \begin_inset space ~
37048 \begin_inset Newline newline
37055 pagedeclaration}[1]{
37056 \begin_inset Newline newline
37062 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37066 \begin_inset space ~
37084 \begin_layout Standard
37085 If the numbers should be hyperlinks,
37086 assure that you use
37089 \begin_inset space ~
37094 in the document settings under
37097 \begin_inset space ~
37105 \begin_layout Standard
37113 \begin_inset Newline newline
37117 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37121 \begin_inset space ~
37134 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
37136 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
37137 \begin_inset Newline newline
37144 pagedeclaration}[1]{
37145 \begin_inset Newline newline
37149 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37153 \begin_inset space ~
37166 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
37171 \begin_layout Subsection
37172 Printing the Nomenclature
37173 \begin_inset Index idx
37178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37180 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37197 \begin_layout Standard
37198 To print the nomenclature,
37201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37202 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
37207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37218 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
37219 By right-clicking on it,
37220 the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
37221 You can choose between these settings:
37224 \begin_layout Description
37225 Default a space of 1
37226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37232 \begin_layout Description
37234 \begin_inset space ~
37238 \begin_inset space ~
37241 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
37244 \begin_layout Description
37245 Custom custom space
37248 \begin_layout Standard
37249 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
37250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37258 If you are not happy with the name,
37259 you can change it by redefining the command
37267 in order to change the name to
37272 add the following line to the preamble:
37275 \begin_layout Standard
37288 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
37291 \begin_layout Standard
37292 When you are using another document language than English,
37294 \begin_inset Newline newline
37310 where *** is the name of the language used.
37313 \begin_layout Subsection
37314 Nomenclature Program
37315 \begin_inset Index idx
37320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37322 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37339 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
37346 \begin_layout Standard
37353 that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
37355 to generate the nomenclature.
37357 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
37363 \begin_inset space ~
37367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37369 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
37375 The available options are listed and explained in
37376 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37378 key "nomencl,makeindex"
37386 \begin_layout Section
37388 \begin_inset Index idx
37393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37400 \begin_inset Index idx
37405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37407 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37424 name "sec:Branches"
37431 \begin_layout Standard
37432 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
37433 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the pupils to see the answers,
37434 but having questions and answers in the same document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
37437 \begin_layout Standard
37438 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
37439 allows you to put text into branches.
37440 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
37441 To create a branch,
37442 either select the menu
37444 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37445 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
37448 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
37450 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37458 where you can specify and change the name of the branch,
37459 its activation state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
37460 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
37461 and whether the name of the branch should be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active (see below for an example).
37463 the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch to the name of the other) and to add
37464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37472 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37476 \begin_inset space ~
37479 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents,
37480 without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
37483 \begin_layout Standard
37484 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
37485 These boxes are inserted via the menu
37487 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37490 where you can choose a branch.
37491 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking on them.
37494 \begin_layout Standard
37495 Here is an example,
37496 where only the question text appears,
37497 the answer branch is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
37500 \begin_layout Standard
37501 \begin_inset Branch Question
37505 \begin_layout Standard
37511 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
37519 \begin_layout Standard
37520 \begin_inset Branch Answer
37524 \begin_layout Standard
37530 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
37538 \begin_layout Standard
37545 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37546 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37550 the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
37551 Consider for example a file
37552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37559 which has the above branches.
37561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37569 the PDF export file would be called
37570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37593 branch were inactive,
37595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37632 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
37633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37636 if both branches were active.
37637 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
37638 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
37644 \begin_layout Standard
37645 It is also possible to invert just some branch insets,
37646 whose content is output just in case the branch is
37650 activated (they are marked with ~ before the name).
37651 Such insets make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
37652 To control whether a particular inset is inverted,
37653 right-click on the inset button and choose
37656 \begin_inset space ~
37664 \begin_layout Standard
37665 \begin_inset Branch Answer
37669 \begin_layout Standard
37676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37683 branch is deactivated.
37689 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
37695 \begin_layout Standard
37696 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
37697 like inside equations,
37698 you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
37699 definitions for each branch.
37700 For example you can define for the question branch
37704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37705 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37708 \begin_inset space ~
37712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37714 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
37727 \begin_layout Standard
37737 \begin_layout Standard
37747 \begin_layout Standard
37748 and for the answer branch
37751 \begin_layout Standard
37761 \begin_layout Standard
37771 \begin_layout Standard
37772 \begin_inset Branch Question
37776 \begin_layout Standard
37780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37808 \begin_layout Standard
37809 \begin_inset Branch Answer
37813 \begin_layout Standard
37817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37845 \begin_layout Standard
37846 Now it is possible to use the
37850 question{\SpecialChar ldots
37857 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
37860 commands to obtain conditional output.
37861 Here is an example formula where only the
37868 \begin_inset Formula
37870 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
37878 \begin_layout Standard
37880 the same effect can be achieved using math macros,
37888 \begin_layout Standard
37889 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout files (e.
37890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37894 \begin_inset space \space{}
37897 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
37899 For this advanced usage,
37907 Flex insets and InsetLayout
37912 \begin_layout Standard
37913 In case you often need to keep all branches of a given name in sync as far as their open/close status is concerned,
37914 you can use the \SpecialChar LyX
37919 that sets the open/close state to all branches of the same name from the branch currently at cursor.
37920 You can bind it to a keyboard shortcut or add it to a user-defined context menu for branch insets.
37923 \begin_layout Section
37925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37927 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
37932 \begin_inset Index idx
37937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37946 \begin_layout Standard
37949 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37950 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37953 allows you to set up specifics of your document's PDF output.
37954 Most of these specifics are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37960 \begin_inset Index idx
37965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37968 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37982 which you need to enable by clicking
37984 Use Hyperref Support
37986 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by your document class or another package,
37987 the checkbox you need to click is labeled
37989 Customize Hyperref Options
37992 Among other things,
37993 hyperref hyperlinks all URLs and cross-references in the PDF output.
37994 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on an URL,
37995 a table of contents entry or on a reference to open a website or to move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
37997 you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
37998 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
38001 \begin_layout Standard
38002 The header information in the dialog tab
38006 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
38007 Many programs are able to extract this information,
38009 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
38010 This is very useful to sort,
38011 classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
38015 \begin_inset space ~
38019 \begin_inset space ~
38025 hyperref tries to extract the header information from your document title and author entries.
38029 \begin_inset space ~
38033 \begin_inset space ~
38037 \begin_inset space ~
38042 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode,
38043 which is useful for presentations.
38046 \begin_layout Standard
38051 you can customize the look of such links,
38052 and you can specify if and which bibliographical backreferences are created.
38057 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either sections,
38058 pages or slides on which these entries are being cited.
38062 \begin_inset space ~
38066 \begin_inset space ~
38070 \begin_inset space ~
38075 option allows long links to be split;
38079 \begin_inset space ~
38083 \begin_inset space ~
38087 \begin_inset space ~
38095 \begin_inset space ~
38100 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
38104 \begin_inset space ~
38109 colors the different links.
38110 The default colors are:
38113 \begin_layout Labeling
38114 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
38119 for hyperlinks and URLs
38122 \begin_layout Labeling
38123 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
38131 \begin_layout Labeling
38132 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
38140 \begin_layout Standard
38141 but you can change these in the tab
38147 in this document they were changed with these additional options added to
38154 \begin_layout Quote
38163 \begin_layout Standard
38168 you can specify if PDF bookmarks (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader) should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
38169 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections or not.
38174 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening the PDF.
38179 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
38181 \begin_inset space ~
38184 2 will display all sections and subsections,
38186 \begin_inset space ~
38189 1 will only display the sections (collapsing the rest).
38192 \begin_layout Standard
38197 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref manual
38198 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38205 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
38206 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
38207 \begin_inset Flex Code
38210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38219 not via the package options.
38220 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
38221 If you need to use one of those options,
38222 you can set them by adding
38225 \begin_layout Quote
38228 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option2
38231 \begin_layout Standard
38234 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38235 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38238 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
38241 \begin_layout Standard
38246 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
38248 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
38249 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions,
38250 input is simply ignored).
38251 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
38257 At the point of writing this,
38258 the list of options is still rather small and not very well documented (look for a file called
38260 documentmetadata-support.pdf
38263 but it is expected that in the future,
38264 rather fundamental PDF properties (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
38267 \begin_layout Section
38269 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38273 name "sec:TeX-Code"
38280 \begin_layout Subsection
38283 \begin_inset Index idx
38288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38298 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
38305 \begin_layout Standard
38306 As \SpecialChar LyX
38307 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
38309 it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
38310 commands and constructs,
38313 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
38314 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
38315 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38316 -package for every problem,
38317 though \SpecialChar LyX
38318 cannot support all packages and their commands.
38321 \begin_layout Standard
38323 you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
38324 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
38325 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
38328 Code box is created by the menu
38330 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38332 \begin_inset space ~
38337 or by the toolbar button
38350 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on it and selecting
38357 \begin_layout Standard
38358 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
38360 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
38363 if you want to draw a frame around a word
38367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38368 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
38373 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38381 you can write the command part
38387 in a \SpecialChar TeX
38388 Code box before the word and the closing brace
38392 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
38393 Code box behind the word.
38394 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
38395 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the following example:
38398 \begin_layout Standard
38399 \begin_inset Graphics
38400 filename clipart/ERT.png
38408 \begin_layout Standard
38412 \begin_layout Standard
38413 This is a line with a
38417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38440 \begin_layout Standard
38441 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38450 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
38451 -commands without parameters,
38452 you have to insert a space to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
38453 know that the command is finished.
38461 \begin_layout Subsection
38462 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38464 \begin_inset Argument 1
38467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38468 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
38475 \begin_inset Index idx
38480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38490 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
38497 \begin_layout Standard
38498 When you write larger documents or books,
38499 you will need to know something about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38500 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
38501 uses in the background.
38502 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
38503 is based on commands,
38505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38513 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at any time if you know the right commands.
38515 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the end of the day.
38516 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have all caption labels bold.
38517 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels in your manual.
38518 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one day.
38521 \begin_layout Standard
38522 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
38524 As mentioned above,
38525 for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38527 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38530 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38540 \begin_layout Standard
38541 As result you find that the package
38546 \begin_inset Index idx
38551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38554 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38570 you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
38572 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38575 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38579 \begin_inset space ~
38587 \begin_layout Standard
38592 usepackage[options]{package name}
38595 \begin_layout Standard
38596 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
38597 commands begin with a backslash,
38598 the command argument is set within two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
38599 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
38602 \begin_layout Standard
38603 In your case the package name is
38608 After a look in the documentation of the package,
38609 you know that the option
38613 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
38614 So you add the command
38617 \begin_layout Standard
38622 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
38625 \begin_layout Standard
38626 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
38630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38631 For more commands provided by the
38636 have a look at its documentation,
38638 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38653 \begin_layout Standard
38654 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems like your case.
38655 For example if you use a
38660 you don't need the package
38665 you can instead write
38668 \begin_layout Standard
38673 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
38678 \begin_layout Standard
38679 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
38680 So if you plan to write a large document,
38681 you should have a look at the documentation of the document class you want to use.
38688 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
38691 \begin_layout Standard
38692 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document,
38693 while commands in the text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command argument.
38694 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38696 use the \SpecialChar TeX
38697 Code box as described in the previous section.
38700 \begin_layout Standard
38701 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
38703 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38705 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38707 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
38715 \begin_layout Standard
38716 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
38722 \begin_layout Standard
38726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38736 \begin_inset Note Note
38739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38740 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
38748 \begin_layout Left Header
38749 \begin_inset Argument 1
38752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38772 \begin_inset Note Note
38775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38776 defines the header line as described below
38784 \begin_layout Center Header
38785 \begin_inset Argument 1
38788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38797 \begin_layout Right Header
38798 \begin_inset Argument 1
38801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38822 \begin_layout Left Footer
38823 \begin_inset Argument 1
38826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38847 \begin_layout Center Footer
38848 \begin_inset Argument 1
38851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38863 \begin_inset Newline newline
38867 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
38873 \begin_layout Right Footer
38874 \begin_inset Argument 1
38877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38899 \begin_layout Section
38900 Customized Page Headers and Footers
38901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38903 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
38908 \begin_inset Index idx
38913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38915 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38930 \begin_inset Index idx
38935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38944 \begin_layout Standard
38945 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document,
38946 you need to set the
38949 \begin_inset space ~
38960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38966 \begin_inset space ~
38972 As a second step add in the menu
38974 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38975 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38984 Custom Header/Footerlines
38987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38991 This module offers the following 6
38992 \begin_inset space ~
38998 \begin_layout Description
39000 \begin_inset space ~
39004 \begin_inset space ~
39008 \begin_inset space ~
39012 \begin_inset space ~
39016 \begin_inset space ~
39022 \begin_layout Description
39024 \begin_inset space ~
39028 \begin_inset space ~
39032 \begin_inset space ~
39036 \begin_inset space ~
39040 \begin_inset space ~
39046 \begin_layout Standard
39047 for the different positions in the header/footer.
39048 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
39051 \begin_layout Standard
39053 headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
39054 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
39056 \begin_inset space ~
39060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39062 reference "fig:Page-layout"
39067 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
39070 \begin_layout Standard
39071 \begin_inset Float figure
39078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39081 \begin_inset Tabular
39082 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
39083 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
39084 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
39085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
39086 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
39088 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
39091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
39100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39106 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39117 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
39120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39135 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39146 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
39149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39150 The normal text on the page goes here.
39151 The running header is above the text,
39152 and the footer is below (including footnotes).
39153 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number,
39154 title of the chapter,
39155 company logo but you can use almost anything,
39161 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39170 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39181 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
39184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39199 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39210 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
39213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
39222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39228 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39246 \begin_inset Caption Standard
39248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39251 name "fig:Page-layout"
39255 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
39268 \begin_layout Standard
39269 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39278 some document classes implement their own customized page headers and footers if
39281 \begin_inset space ~
39286 is set to “Default”.
39287 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers and footers.
39295 \begin_layout Subsection
39299 \begin_layout Standard
39300 To define your header line,
39301 add all three header environments.
39302 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages,
39303 the things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
39304 For single-sided documents,
39305 the optional arguments will not be used and can be omitted.
39306 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty,
39307 nothing appears in the output.
39308 Defining the footer line works similarly.
39311 \begin_layout Standard
39312 For the definition,
39313 you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
39314 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
39317 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39319 \begin_inset space ~
39327 \begin_layout Description
39330 thepage prints the current page number
39333 \begin_layout Description
39336 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
39339 \begin_layout Description
39342 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
39345 \begin_layout Description
39348 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
39349 If the document has chapters,
39350 it prints the current chapter number and title instead.
39352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39356 \begin_inset Quotes prd
39359 because it usually goes in a left header.
39362 \begin_layout Description
39365 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
39366 If the document has chapters,
39367 it prints the current section number and title instead.
39368 It is normally used in the right header.
39371 \begin_layout Subsection
39372 Default header/footer
39375 \begin_layout Standard
39376 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
39377 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center footer has the page number.
39378 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer,
39379 include the relevant header/footer style in your document,
39380 but leave it blank.
39382 if you do not want a page number in the footer,
39386 \begin_inset space ~
39394 \begin_layout Subsection
39398 \begin_layout Standard
39399 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
39400 Some pages are different.
39401 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own,
39402 and so does any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
39403 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers,
39404 but that is normal.
39405 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
39408 \begin_layout Subsubsection
39409 Header and footer decoration line
39412 \begin_layout Standard
39415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39418 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
39419 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
39431 in the following way:
39434 \begin_layout Standard
39441 headrulewidth}{thickness}
39444 \begin_layout Standard
39445 where thickness is a size in standard units like
39458 If you don't want a line,
39459 set the thickness to 0
39460 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39466 \begin_layout Standard
39467 The lines can also be colored,
39468 but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
39470 If you really need this,
39471 have a look at the Internet or in section
39472 \begin_inset space ~
39476 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39486 \begin_layout Subsubsection
39487 Several header/footer lines
39490 \begin_layout Standard
39491 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer,
39492 you can do this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
39494 the default height of the header/footer is only the height of one text line.
39495 To expand the height,
39496 redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39511 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39512 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39514 \begin_inset space ~
39522 \begin_layout Standard
39529 headheight}{height}
39532 \begin_layout Standard
39537 is a size in standard units (e.
39538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39542 \begin_inset space \space{}
39550 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height,
39551 define your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
39552 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39553 logfile with the menu
39555 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39557 \begin_inset space ~
39565 \begin_inset space ~
39570 to see if you can find a warning about the package
39575 \begin_inset Index idx
39580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39583 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39598 If there is such a warning,
39599 it contains the space that you need at least for your header/footer.
39602 \begin_layout Subsection
39606 \begin_layout Standard
39607 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
39608 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
39609 This example consists of the following definition:
39612 \begin_layout Description
39614 \begin_inset space ~
39624 empty optional argument
39627 \begin_layout Description
39629 \begin_inset space ~
39633 empty optional argument
39636 \begin_layout Description
39638 \begin_inset space ~
39648 in the optional argument
39651 \begin_layout Description
39653 \begin_inset space ~
39663 in the optional argument
39666 \begin_layout Description
39668 \begin_inset space ~
39682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39686 \begin_inset Newline newline
39690 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
39694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39697 in the optional argument
39700 \begin_layout Description
39702 \begin_inset space ~
39712 empty optional argument
39715 \begin_layout Description
39718 headrulewidth set to 2
39719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39725 \begin_layout Standard
39726 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers,
39728 For more specialized features,
39731 see the manual of the
39737 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39747 \begin_layout Standard
39748 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
39754 \begin_layout Standard
39758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39762 pagestyle{headings}
39768 \begin_inset Note Note
39771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39772 switches back to page style with the default headings
39780 \begin_layout Section
39781 Previewing Snippets of your Document
39782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39784 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39789 \begin_inset Index idx
39794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39801 \begin_inset Index idx
39806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39808 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39825 \begin_layout Standard
39827 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
39830 \begin_layout Subsection
39834 \begin_layout Standard
39835 To get previews working,
39836 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39842 \begin_inset Index idx
39847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39850 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39864 (on some systems named simply
39869 If it is not already installed,
39870 you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39873 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39880 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39882 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
39891 for \SpecialChar LyX
39892 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39893 -package are automatically installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
39897 \begin_layout Subsection
39901 \begin_layout Standard
39902 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
39903 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
39905 activate the option
39908 \begin_inset space ~
39915 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39921 \begin_inset space ~
39925 \begin_inset space ~
39928 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
39935 \begin_inset space ~
39948 \begin_inset space ~
39953 is the multiplication factor for the size.
39956 \begin_layout Standard
39957 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
39962 \begin_inset space ~
39970 \begin_inset space ~
39978 \begin_layout Standard
39979 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
39980 and when you finish editing an inset.
39983 \begin_layout Standard
39984 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39993 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately generated by activating the option
39996 \begin_inset space ~
40002 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
40010 \begin_layout Subsection
40011 Selected document parts
40014 \begin_layout Standard
40015 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
40016 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
40017 cannot render like rotated parts or things that are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
40020 insert a preview inset via the menu
40022 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40026 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
40027 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
40028 If you click on the preview,
40029 you can edit the previewed stuff.
40032 \begin_layout Standard
40034 To create rotated boxes,
40035 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40042 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
40047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40054 is explained in section
40056 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
40061 \begin_inset space ~
40071 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
40072 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
40073 the final rotated boxes,
40074 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
40075 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated boxes into it.
40076 Here is the result:
40079 \begin_layout Standard
40080 \begin_inset Preview
40082 \begin_layout Standard
40087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40091 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
40097 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
40107 height_special "totalheight"
40112 backgroundcolor "none"
40115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40140 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
40146 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
40153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40168 \begin_layout Standard
40169 Previewing works also for colors.
40170 In this example a special framed,
40171 colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40189 is explained in section
40196 \begin_inset space ~
40209 \begin_layout Standard
40210 \begin_inset Preview
40212 \begin_layout Standard
40216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40235 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
40240 This is text within a colored,
40245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40260 \begin_layout Standard
40261 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
40267 \begin_layout Standard
40268 If \SpecialChar LyX
40269 does not show a preview,
40270 make sure that you enabled previews as described above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
40271 Code in the preview inset is valid and that you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40272 packages in your document preamble that are required by the \SpecialChar TeX
40274 If \SpecialChar LyX
40275 cannot create a preview,
40276 you will in most cases also not be able to view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40278 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
40279 Code and don't know if it is correct,
40280 the preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
40283 \begin_layout Subsection
40288 \begin_layout Standard
40289 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40290 source of the whole document or parts of it.
40293 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
40295 \begin_inset space ~
40300 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40302 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor currently sits.
40303 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
40305 then only this selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
40306 To view the whole document as source,
40307 enable the corresponding option in the source view window.
40313 you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
40315 but note that if you have several documents open,
40316 this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
40318 not just the one which is open at the time.
40321 \begin_layout Section
40322 Advanced Find and Replace
40323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40325 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40330 \begin_inset Index idx
40335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40342 \begin_inset Index idx
40347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40356 \begin_layout Subsection
40360 \begin_layout Standard
40361 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
40362 allows for searching of complex,
40363 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
40365 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
40366 The key-features are:
40369 \begin_layout Itemize
40370 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed,
40371 where the latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way;
40372 not only entire mathematical formulas are found,
40373 but also parts occurring within more complex formulas
40376 \begin_layout Itemize
40377 Search may be format-insensitive,
40378 so that the searched text is found in any context/style (standard text,
40381 and even mathematics),
40382 or it may be format-sensitive,
40385 a word entered with a section heading will only be found within section headings
40388 \begin_layout Itemize
40389 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only;
40390 this is useful for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text outside of mathematics environments
40393 \begin_layout Itemize
40394 Search may be widened to a specific
40400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40404 \begin_inset space ~
40407 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
40408 all the open files,
40409 or all the manuals available from the
40416 \begin_layout Itemize
40417 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization,
40418 so that the replaced text capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
40419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40423 \begin_inset space ~
40428 first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
40431 \begin_layout Subsection
40435 \begin_layout Standard
40436 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
40438 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40451 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
40454 ) or the toolbar button
40457 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
40463 Advanced Find and Replace
40468 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40472 \begin_layout Standard
40478 mini-editor a simple word,
40479 and search for occurrences of it by clicking on the
40482 \begin_inset space ~
40487 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
40490 arg "paragraph-break"
40494 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode,
40496 bold or normal face,
40497 and in both in section titles and in standard text.
40501 arg "paragraph-break"
40504 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
40508 searches backwards.
40511 \begin_layout Standard
40515 \begin_inset space ~
40520 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
40528 \begin_inset space ~
40533 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
40536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40537 Searching for mathematics
40540 \begin_layout Standard
40541 Mathematical formulas,
40543 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
40546 or something more complex like
40547 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
40551 may be searched for by typing them in the
40556 When searching for a formula,
40557 it is found both when it is alone and when it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
40558 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
40559 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
40565 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40569 \begin_layout Standard
40570 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
40571 This is done by switching to the
40575 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
40588 \begin_layout Itemize
40589 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring in emphasized or boldface.
40592 \begin_layout Itemize
40593 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective instances with the same face only,
40594 and within the same text style only.
40597 \begin_layout Itemize
40598 a normal word in a section heading,
40599 and searching for it,
40600 would find occurrences of it only within section headings.
40602 if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face,
40603 in addition to a section style,
40604 then it is found only when occurring with the same style.
40607 \begin_layout Itemize
40608 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
40611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40615 \begin_layout Standard
40616 The entries made in the
40620 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
40623 \begin_inset space ~
40629 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it,
40634 button or alternatively press
40637 arg "paragraph-break"
40644 while the cursor is in the
40647 \begin_inset space ~
40655 \begin_layout Standard
40656 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
40658 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention two):
40661 \begin_layout Itemize
40662 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the same word,
40663 for example replacing occurrences of a name like
40664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40671 with its typewriter version
40672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40686 \begin_layout Itemize
40687 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols,
40688 for example replacing occurrences of
40689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40693 \begin_inset Formula $R$
40697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40705 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
40709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40712 (you may want to enable the
40715 \begin_inset space ~
40723 \begin_inset space ~
40728 options and disable the
40737 in order to avoid replacing all
40738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40745 letters occurring in normal text),
40747 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
40751 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
40756 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
40760 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
40766 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40770 \begin_layout Standard
40771 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
40775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40776 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
40778 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40780 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
40790 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into the
40795 This is done with the context menu
40797 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40798 Insert Regular Expression
40800 while the cursor is in the
40805 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular expression matching rules
40809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40810 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
40813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40817 \begin_inset space ~
40820 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
40822 no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to match expressions.
40828 while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the same text in the document.
40829 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
40830 Examples of using such a feature may be:
40833 \begin_layout Enumerate
40834 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator:
40840 editor the fraction
40841 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
40845 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
40848 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all fractions with the given denominator.
40851 \begin_layout Enumerate
40852 Searching for all text with a given style:
40856 Adhere to search string formatting of
40862 button in this section pressed,
40866 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
40871 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face,
40872 finds all emphasized or bold face text respectively.
40875 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
40878 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
40879 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
40880 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
40884 \begin_layout Description
40885 Language Allows searching for text in specific language (relevant here is,
40886 as with the other options,
40887 the setting of the search string)
40890 \begin_layout Description
40892 \begin_inset space ~
40895 color colored text like cyan,
40900 \begin_layout Description
40902 \begin_inset space ~
40910 \begin_layout Description
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40919 \begin_layout Description
40921 \begin_inset space ~
40930 \begin_layout Description
40932 \begin_inset space ~
40941 \begin_layout Description
40942 Emph/noun Semantic Markup:
40947 \begin_layout Description
40954 \begin_layout Description
40955 Strike-through Single,
40959 \begin_layout Description
40960 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
40963 \begin_layout Description
40965 \begin_inset space ~
40977 \begin_layout Standard
40979 references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
40980 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
40981 \begin_inset Formula $()$
40985 and referring back to them through
40986 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
40991 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
40997 try searching with the regexp
40998 \begin_inset Newline newline
41012 \begin_inset Newline newline
41015 in order to find word repetitions,
41019 \begin_layout Standard
41020 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) fully implemented.
41023 \begin_layout Standard
41024 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41033 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
41034 and when occurring in multiple different regexps,
41035 where the numbering of back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute.
41037 \begin_inset space ~
41041 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
41044 always refers to the first occurrence of
41045 \begin_inset Formula $()$
41048 in all entered regexps.
41056 \begin_layout Section
41058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41060 name "sec:Spellchecking"
41065 \begin_inset Index idx
41070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41079 \begin_layout Standard
41081 has a built-in spell checker.
41084 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41092 key or the toolbar button
41095 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41098 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the beginning of the currently selected text.
41099 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found,
41100 allowing you to edit and replace it in a second line.
41101 Whenever an unknown word is found,
41102 the word is highlighted and the text scrolled so that it is visible.
41103 In the spellchecker sidebar,
41104 there is a box showing suggestions for a correction,
41105 if any could be found.
41106 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
41111 double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
41112 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
41115 \begin_layout Standard
41117 the dictionary file used is determined by the document language that is set in the
41119 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41123 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing a different one at the top of the dialog.
41125 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
41126 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
41129 \begin_inset space ~
41137 arg "dialog-show character"
41140 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
41142 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
41145 \begin_layout Standard
41146 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
41147 can be downloaded from here:
41148 \begin_inset Newline newline
41152 \begin_inset Flex URL
41155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41157 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
41163 \begin_inset Newline newline
41166 You should download 2
41167 \begin_inset space ~
41170 files for each language (use
41174 link at the end of the opened webpage).
41175 To install a dictionary on Windows,
41177 \begin_inset space ~
41180 files into \SpecialChar LyX
41181 's installation subfolder
41189 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
41191 \begin_inset Newline newline
41194 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
41195 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
41196 but in most cases these are
41216 is the language code.
41219 \begin_layout Subsection
41223 \begin_layout Standard
41226 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41227 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41229 \begin_inset space ~
41232 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41235 you can set the following things:
41238 \begin_layout Description
41240 \begin_inset space ~
41243 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
41244 should use for spell checking.
41245 Depending on your platform,
41256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41257 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
41258 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
41273 \begin_inset space ~
41276 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
41279 \begin_layout Description
41281 \begin_inset space ~
41284 language If this field is not empty,
41286 will always use the given language for the spell checking,
41287 no matter what the document language is.
41290 \begin_layout Description
41292 \begin_inset space ~
41295 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker should escape,
41297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41301 \begin_inset space \space{}
41305 This should normally not be needed.
41308 \begin_layout Description
41310 \begin_inset space ~
41314 \begin_inset space ~
41317 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words like
41318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41328 \begin_layout Description
41330 \begin_inset space ~
41333 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
41334 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
41335 By right-clicking on an underlined word,
41336 suggestions from the spellchecker appear in a context menu.
41337 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested word.
41340 \begin_layout Description
41342 \begin_inset space ~
41346 \begin_inset space ~
41350 \begin_inset space ~
41353 comments If enabled,
41354 the spelling of non-printed document content is checked as well.
41357 \begin_layout Section
41359 \begin_inset Index idx
41364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41373 name "sec:Thesaurus"
41380 \begin_layout Standard
41382 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
41383 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice,
41384 OpenOffice and Firefox (namely the
41392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41393 \begin_inset CommandInset href
41395 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
41406 which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
41410 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
41411 which are available for many languages.
41414 \begin_layout Standard
41415 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for the use with \SpecialChar LyX
41419 \begin_layout Subsection
41420 Setting up the thesaurus
41423 \begin_layout Standard
41432 thesauri consist of two files per language:
41433 A file with the suffix
41437 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
41442 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language (e.
41443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41447 \begin_inset space ~
41456 the US English files are named:
41459 \begin_layout Itemize
41463 \begin_layout Itemize
41467 \begin_layout Standard
41476 and its thesaurus installed,
41477 these files should be already on your system and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
41480 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41481 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41482 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
41484 \begin_inset space ~
41489 ) to the path where they are installed.
41493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41495 depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionaries,
41496 typical locations are
41503 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
41508 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
41513 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
41517 dictionaries are to be found at
41523 LibreOffice-<Version>
41531 the default location is
41533 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
41534 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
41535 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
41536 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
41537 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
41538 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
41547 you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation during the \SpecialChar LyX
41548 installation process,
41549 which will then be installed in the correct place right away.
41552 \begin_layout Standard
41553 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
41554 updated thesaurus dictionaries,
41555 you can download them from here:
41556 \begin_inset Newline newline
41560 \begin_inset Flex URL
41563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41565 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
41573 \begin_layout Standard
41574 To install a new dictionary,
41575 download the two files for this dictionary into the thesaurus path (which is set in
41577 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41578 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41579 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
41581 \begin_inset space ~
41586 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
41588 If this path is not defined yet,
41589 you can use a dictionary of your choice and point \SpecialChar LyX
41593 \begin_layout Standard
41595 you can also install new dictionaries via
41597 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
41602 via your package manager (look for
41608 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
41612 make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
41613 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
41615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41621 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41622 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41623 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
41625 \begin_inset space ~
41630 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
41633 \begin_layout Subsection
41634 Using the thesaurus
41637 \begin_layout Standard
41638 To start the thesaurus,
41641 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41644 or the toolbar button
41647 arg "thesaurus-entry"
41650 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is selected.
41651 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as a replacement.
41652 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
41654 for some languages (such as English),
41655 the thesaurus does not only show equivalent words (synonyms),
41656 but also generic terms (such as
41665 related terms (such as
41668 \begin_inset space ~
41681 \begin_inset space ~
41691 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
41701 related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
41704 \begin_layout Standard
41705 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor,
41706 but you can also switch it in the dialog,
41707 as you can enter new words to look up directly there.
41710 \begin_layout Standard
41711 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in the dictionary,
41717 and you have to use the so called lemma form,
41719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41723 \begin_inset space \space{}
41726 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages:
41727 first person singular indicative active for nouns,
41728 infinitive for verbs).
41730 looking up the word form
41735 while results are shown for the word form
41740 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
41741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41745 \begin_inset space \space{}
41757 then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in the dialog,
41758 and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted part will be replaced;
41759 thus the ending remains).
41762 \begin_layout Section
41764 \begin_inset Index idx
41769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41776 \begin_inset Index idx
41781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41783 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41800 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
41807 \begin_layout Standard
41808 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
41809 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
41810 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
41812 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41814 \begin_inset space ~
41817 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
41819 \begin_inset space ~
41827 \begin_layout Standard
41828 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
41843 The color depends on the author that made the change.
41844 You can change the color in
41846 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41847 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41849 \begin_inset space ~
41853 \begin_inset space ~
41858 \SpecialChar menuseparator
41864 \begin_inset Index idx
41869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41871 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41885 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
41886 's status bar when the cursor is in changed text.
41887 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
41890 arg "changes-merge"
41896 \begin_layout Standard
41897 When change tracking is activated,
41898 you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
41900 \begin_inset Index idx
41905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41907 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41924 \begin_layout Standard
41925 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41931 \begin_layout Standard
41932 \begin_inset Graphics
41933 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
41941 \begin_layout Standard
41942 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41948 \begin_layout Standard
41949 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
41952 \begin_layout Standard
41953 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41959 \begin_layout Standard
41960 \begin_inset Tabular
41961 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
41962 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41963 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41964 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41965 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41974 arg "changes-track"
41982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41988 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41990 \begin_inset space ~
41993 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
41995 \begin_inset space ~
42004 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42013 arg "changes-output"
42021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42027 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42029 \begin_inset space ~
42032 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42034 \begin_inset space ~
42038 \begin_inset space ~
42042 \begin_inset space ~
42051 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42072 Jumps to the next change
42078 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42087 arg "change-accept"
42095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42103 \begin_inset space ~
42106 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42108 \begin_inset space ~
42117 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42126 arg "change-reject"
42134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42140 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42142 \begin_inset space ~
42145 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42147 \begin_inset space ~
42156 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42165 arg "changes-merge"
42173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42179 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42181 \begin_inset space ~
42184 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42186 \begin_inset space ~
42195 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42204 arg "all-changes-accept"
42212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42220 \begin_inset space ~
42223 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42225 \begin_inset space ~
42229 \begin_inset space ~
42238 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42247 arg "all-changes-reject"
42255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42263 \begin_inset space ~
42266 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42268 \begin_inset space ~
42272 \begin_inset space ~
42281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42304 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42305 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42307 \begin_inset space ~
42316 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42339 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42341 \begin_inset space ~
42357 \begin_layout Standard
42358 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42364 \begin_layout Standard
42365 Not all changes are (yet) visualized,
42366 especially no format changes like from
42385 \begin_layout Standard
42386 The review toolbar helps you to accept,
42388 or merge changes – highlight the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
42389 When you merge changes,
42390 a window pops up showing you information about the next change after the current cursor position.
42391 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
42392 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and step to the next change.
42393 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
42396 \begin_layout Standard
42397 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important to describe a change.
42400 \begin_layout Section
42401 Comparison of Documents
42402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42404 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42409 \begin_inset Index idx
42414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42415 Comparison of documents
42423 \begin_layout Standard
42424 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
42427 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42431 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
42432 file with change tracking enabled showing the differences.
42433 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
42434 should take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
42437 \begin_inset space ~
42441 \begin_inset space ~
42445 \begin_inset space ~
42454 \begin_inset space ~
42458 \begin_inset space ~
42462 \begin_inset space ~
42466 \begin_inset space ~
42470 \begin_inset space ~
42474 \begin_inset space ~
42479 enables the change tracking option
42482 \begin_inset space ~
42486 \begin_inset space ~
42490 \begin_inset space ~
42495 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
42498 \begin_layout Section
42499 International Support
42500 \begin_inset Index idx
42505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42506 International support
42514 \begin_layout Standard
42515 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
42516 with any language you want.
42517 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
42520 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42522 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
42530 \begin_layout Standard
42533 also supports phonetic symbols,
42535 \begin_inset space ~
42539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42541 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
42549 \begin_layout Subsection
42551 \begin_inset Index idx
42556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42558 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42573 \begin_inset Index idx
42578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42580 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42595 \begin_inset Index idx
42600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42602 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42619 \begin_layout Standard
42622 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42623 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42626 dialog lets you set
42629 the quote style and character encoding
42634 \begin_layout Standard
42639 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42644 \begin_inset space ~
42649 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
42650 For details about the different encoding options see section
42651 \begin_inset space ~
42655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42657 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
42665 \begin_layout Subsection
42666 Keyboard mapping configuration
42667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42669 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
42676 \begin_layout Standard
42677 If you have for example a U.
42678 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42681 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English,
42682 you can use an alternate keymap.
42684 if you want to write in Italian,
42685 you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
42686 to use an Italian keymap.
42689 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42690 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42691 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
42694 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
42696 \begin_inset space ~
42700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42702 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
42708 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select which one you want to use.
42711 \begin_layout Standard
42713 you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely different keymap (for Vulcan,
42717 normally write in Italian on a U.
42718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42721 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
42723 you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing one to support the characters you want.
42724 This and many other customizations are explained in the
42731 \begin_layout Chapter
42734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42736 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
42743 \begin_layout Standard
42744 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
42745 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special topic inside the user's guide.
42748 \begin_layout Section
42750 \begin_inset Index idx
42755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42757 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42774 \begin_layout Standard
42779 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
42782 \begin_layout Subsection
42786 \begin_layout Standard
42787 Creates a new document.
42790 \begin_layout Subsection
42794 \begin_layout Standard
42795 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
42796 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for the document,
42797 features you would otherwise need to change manually.
42799 templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring writing tasks.
42802 \begin_layout Subsection
42806 \begin_layout Standard
42810 \begin_layout Subsection
42814 \begin_layout Standard
42815 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
42816 Click there on a file to open it.
42819 \begin_layout Subsection
42823 \begin_layout Standard
42824 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
42828 \begin_layout Subsection
42832 \begin_layout Standard
42833 Closes the current document.
42836 \begin_layout Subsection
42840 \begin_layout Standard
42841 Closes all opened documents.
42844 \begin_layout Subsection
42848 \begin_layout Standard
42849 Saves the actual document.
42852 \begin_layout Subsection
42856 \begin_layout Standard
42857 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
42860 \begin_layout Subsection
42864 \begin_layout Standard
42865 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use as a template.
42868 \begin_layout Subsection
42872 \begin_layout Standard
42873 Saves all opened documents.
42876 \begin_layout Subsection
42880 \begin_layout Standard
42881 Reloads the actual document from disk.
42884 \begin_layout Subsection
42888 \begin_layout Standard
42889 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
42890 It is described in the section
42892 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
42897 Additional Features
42902 \begin_layout Subsection
42906 \begin_layout Standard
42907 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
42913 plain text files and comma separated,
42914 table-like text files (CSV).
42915 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
42919 \begin_layout Standard
42920 When using the menu entry
42923 \begin_inset space ~
42929 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph;
42930 when using the menu entry
42933 \begin_inset space ~
42937 \begin_inset space ~
42941 \begin_inset space ~
42947 consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
42948 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
42951 \begin_layout Subsection
42953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42955 name "subsec:Export"
42962 \begin_layout Standard
42963 You can export your document to various file formats.
42964 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
42966 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
42967 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
42968 during its configuration.
42971 \begin_layout Standard
42972 Here is a list of all available entries;
42973 some of them are explained in detail in section
42974 \begin_inset space ~
42978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42980 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
42988 \begin_layout Description
42994 \begin_inset space ~
42997 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
42999 \begin_inset space ~
43002 1.4.x versions for Chinese,
43003 Japanese and Korean (CJK)
43004 \begin_inset Newline newline
43007 Since \SpecialChar LyX
43008 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
43012 \begin_layout Description
43013 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup language
43018 \begin_layout Description
43020 \begin_inset space ~
43023 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup language
43028 \begin_layout Description
43029 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
43030 's native DVI-format.
43031 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in files paths or file names in your document.
43033 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
43040 \begin_layout Description
43041 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces in files paths or file names
43044 \begin_layout Description
43046 \begin_inset space ~
43053 ) DVI-format using the program
43055 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43059 supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
43064 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43073 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
43081 \begin_layout Description
43083 \begin_inset space ~
43086 (cropped) the same as
43090 but with cropped page margins.
43093 \begin_layout Description
43095 \begin_inset space ~
43098 Dot text file with code in the programming language
43102 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
43107 \begin_layout Description
43112 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43121 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
43129 \begin_layout Description
43131 \begin_inset space ~
43135 \begin_inset space ~
43138 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
43143 as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and not in the format
43150 \begin_layout Description
43154 \begin_inset space ~
43163 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43164 source that is compilable with the program
43166 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43170 \begin_layout Description
43174 \begin_inset space ~
43179 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43181 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
43191 \begin_layout Description
43195 \begin_inset space ~
43200 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43202 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to the EPS-format,
43203 only this format is readable by the
43210 \begin_layout Description
43214 \begin_inset space ~
43223 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43224 source that is compilable with the program
43230 \begin_layout Description
43232 \begin_inset space ~
43236 \begin_inset space ~
43243 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43244 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation software
43249 \begin_layout Description
43251 \begin_inset space ~
43254 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
43255 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
43257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43261 \begin_inset space \space{}
43266 \begin_inset space ~
43271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43286 represent the version number)
43289 \begin_layout Description
43291 \begin_inset space ~
43295 \begin_inset space ~
43298 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary to compile it (images,
43300 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43305 \begin_layout Description
43306 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
43307 's internal XHTML engine
43310 \begin_layout Description
43312 \begin_inset space ~
43316 \begin_inset space ~
43320 \begin_inset space ~
43324 \begin_inset space ~
43327 XML Office Open XML file,
43333 For the conversion the program
43342 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
43345 \begin_layout Description
43346 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
43351 \begin_layout Description
43353 \begin_inset space ~
43356 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file,
43366 For the conversion the program
43375 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
43378 \begin_layout Description
43380 \begin_inset space ~
43383 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
43384 For the conversion the program
43393 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
43396 \begin_layout Description
43398 \begin_inset space ~
43401 (cropped) the same as
43404 \begin_inset space ~
43409 but with cropped page margins
43412 \begin_layout Description
43416 \begin_inset space ~
43421 PDF-format using the program
43426 produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
43429 \begin_layout Description
43433 \begin_inset space ~
43437 \begin_inset space ~
43445 \begin_inset space ~
43450 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
43451 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43455 \begin_inset space \space{}
43458 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermediate preview)
43461 \begin_layout Description
43465 \begin_inset space ~
43470 PDF-format using the program
43472 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43476 produces PDF-files directly
43479 \begin_layout Description
43483 \begin_inset space ~
43488 PDF-format using the program
43493 produces PDF-files directly
43496 \begin_layout Description
43500 \begin_inset space ~
43505 PDF-format using the program
43510 produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
43513 \begin_layout Description
43517 \begin_inset space ~
43522 PDF-format using the program
43528 produces PDF-files directly
43531 \begin_layout Description
43535 \begin_inset space ~
43543 \begin_layout Description
43547 \begin_inset space ~
43551 \begin_inset space ~
43557 the document will first be converted to Postscript format and then exported as text using the program
43562 \begin_layout Description
43567 PostScript format using the program
43576 options see section
43577 \begin_inset space ~
43581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43583 reference "subsec:General-output"
43591 \begin_layout Description
43592 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43593 source and also code in the statistical programming language
43606 it is possible to use
43610 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
43614 \begin_layout Standard
43615 If one of the menu entries
43623 \begin_inset space ~
43633 you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43635 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
43638 \begin_inset space ~
43642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43644 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43650 \begin_inset Index idx
43655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43656 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43665 \begin_layout Subsection
43669 \begin_layout Standard
43670 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
43673 \begin_inset space ~
43677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43679 reference "sec:Paths"
43685 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
43694 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
43695 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
43696 's preferences as described in section
43697 \begin_inset space ~
43701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43703 reference "subsec:Converters"
43711 \begin_layout Subsection
43712 New and Close Window
43715 \begin_layout Standard
43716 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43720 \begin_layout Subsection
43724 \begin_layout Standard
43725 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
43728 \begin_layout Section
43730 \begin_inset Index idx
43735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43737 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43754 \begin_layout Subsection
43758 \begin_layout Standard
43759 Described in section
43760 \begin_inset space ~
43764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43766 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
43774 \begin_layout Subsection
43782 \begin_layout Standard
43783 Described in section
43784 \begin_inset space ~
43788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43790 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
43798 \begin_layout Subsection
43802 \begin_layout Standard
43803 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
43804 If the cursor is outside an inset,
43805 the whole document will be selected.
43808 \begin_layout Subsection
43812 \begin_layout Standard
43813 Selects the whole document.
43816 \begin_layout Subsection
43817 Find & Replace (Quick)
43820 \begin_layout Standard
43821 Described in section
43822 \begin_inset space ~
43826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43828 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
43836 \begin_layout Subsection
43837 Find & Replace (Advanced)
43840 \begin_layout Standard
43841 Described in section
43842 \begin_inset space ~
43846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43848 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
43856 \begin_layout Subsection
43857 Move Paragraph Up/Down
43860 \begin_layout Standard
43861 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph up or down.
43864 \begin_layout Subsection
43866 \begin_inset Index idx
43871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43873 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43890 \begin_layout Standard
43891 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment,
43892 line spacing and label width.
43893 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently in.
43896 \begin_layout Standard
43897 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you have chosen to separate paragraphs with
43903 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43904 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43906 \begin_inset space ~
43914 \begin_layout Subsection
43918 \begin_layout Standard
43919 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text passages.
43923 \begin_layout Enumerate
43924 Customize text properties by means of the
43930 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
43934 this is described in section
43935 \begin_inset space ~
43939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43941 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
43949 \begin_layout Enumerate
43950 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
43952 Apply last settings
43955 \begin_layout Enumerate
43956 Change the casing of selected text (
43973 \begin_layout Subsection
43977 \begin_layout Standard
43978 This sub-menu only appears if the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case of this document:
44004 \begin_inset space ~
44008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44010 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
44018 \begin_layout Subsection
44019 Table and Rows & Columns
44022 \begin_layout Standard
44023 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
44024 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells,
44025 add or remove borders of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
44028 \begin_layout Subsection
44032 \begin_layout Standard
44033 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
44034 It will dissolve this inset.
44035 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
44038 \begin_layout Subsection
44042 \begin_layout Standard
44043 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
44044 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
44047 \begin_layout Subsection
44048 Increase/Decrease List Depth
44051 \begin_layout Standard
44052 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can be nested.
44053 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
44054 \begin_inset space ~
44058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44060 reference "sec:Nesting"
44066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44068 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44076 \begin_layout Section
44078 \begin_inset Index idx
44083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44085 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44102 \begin_layout Standard
44103 At the bottom of the
44107 menu the opened documents are listed.
44110 \begin_layout Subsection
44111 Open/Close all Insets
44114 \begin_layout Standard
44115 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
44118 \begin_layout Subsection
44119 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
44122 \begin_layout Standard
44123 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
44126 \begin_layout Standard
44127 Math macros are described in the
44134 \begin_layout Subsection
44138 \begin_layout Standard
44139 Shows the outline window as described in sections
44140 \begin_inset space ~
44144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44146 reference "sec:Navigating"
44152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44154 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
44162 \begin_layout Subsection
44166 \begin_layout Standard
44167 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document,
44168 as described in section
44169 \begin_inset space ~
44173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44175 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44183 \begin_layout Subsection
44187 \begin_layout Standard
44188 Opens a window showing console messages.
44189 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
44191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44195 hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background while \SpecialChar LaTeX
44196 is processing the document.
44199 \begin_layout Subsection
44201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44203 name "subsec:Toolbars"
44208 \begin_inset Index idx
44213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44222 \begin_layout Standard
44223 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different toolbars.
44224 All toolbars and the
44227 \begin_inset space ~
44245 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
44248 \begin_layout Standard
44252 \begin_inset space ~
44271 \begin_inset space ~
44284 \begin_inset space ~
44289 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
44294 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets you select
44311 \begin_layout Standard
44316 state the toolbar is permanently shown,
44321 state it is never shown;
44326 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment or when a certain feature is enabled.
44327 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking is activated,
44328 the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor is inside a formula or table respectively,
44329 the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment.
44332 \begin_layout Standard
44334 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
44335 \begin_inset space ~
44339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44341 reference "sec:Toolbars"
44349 \begin_layout Subsection
44353 \begin_layout Standard
44357 \begin_inset space ~
44361 \begin_inset space ~
44365 \begin_inset space ~
44369 \begin_inset space ~
44373 \begin_inset space ~
44377 \begin_inset space ~
44382 will split \SpecialChar LyX
44383 's main window vertically while
44386 \begin_inset space ~
44390 \begin_inset space ~
44394 \begin_inset space ~
44398 \begin_inset space ~
44402 \begin_inset space ~
44406 \begin_inset space ~
44411 will split it horizontally.
44412 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them,
44413 or to view the same document,
44414 but at different positions.
44415 You can even split the main window several times to view,
44417 three or more documents at the same time.
44418 To close a split view,
44422 \begin_inset space ~
44426 \begin_inset space ~
44434 \begin_layout Subsection
44438 \begin_layout Standard
44439 Closes a split view.
44442 \begin_layout Subsection
44446 \begin_layout Standard
44447 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars so that you will see nothing but your text.
44448 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
44449 's main window fullscreen.
44450 To return from fullscreen to the normal view,
44452 or right-click and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
44455 \begin_layout Section
44457 \begin_inset Index idx
44462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44464 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44481 \begin_layout Subsection
44485 \begin_layout Standard
44486 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
44487 \begin_inset space ~
44491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44493 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
44505 \begin_layout Subsection
44507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44509 name "subsec:Special-Character"
44516 \begin_layout Standard
44517 Here you can insert the following characters:
44520 \begin_layout Description
44525 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44527 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
44528 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44529 -packages you have installed.
44530 You can get a complete display by checking
44533 \begin_inset space ~
44539 \begin_inset Newline newline
44543 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44552 Not all characters will be visible in the
44556 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences dialog (see section
44557 \begin_inset space ~
44561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44563 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
44568 ) can display every character.
44576 \begin_layout Description
44577 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis:
44582 \begin_layout Description
44584 \begin_inset space ~
44588 \begin_inset space ~
44591 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
44592 \begin_inset space ~
44596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44598 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
44606 \begin_layout Description
44608 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109674
44610 \begin_inset space ~
44614 \begin_inset space ~
44618 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109675
44620 \begin_inset space ~
44626 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109680
44628 \begin_inset space ~
44632 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109681
44635 Inserts this quote:
44637 no matter what quote style you selected in the
44639 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44640 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44646 \begin_layout Description
44648 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109701
44650 \begin_inset space ~
44654 \begin_inset space ~
44658 \begin_inset space ~
44661 Mark Inserts this quote:
44663 \begin_inset Quotes qls
44667 no matter what quote style you have selected.
44670 \begin_layout Description
44672 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109722
44674 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109720
44678 \begin_inset space ~
44682 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109726
44684 \begin_inset space ~
44688 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109727
44692 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109731
44696 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109733
44700 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109738
44701 (usually a single quote)
44703 in the quotation marks style selected in the
44705 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44706 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44712 \begin_layout Description
44714 \begin_inset space ~
44717 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that prevents automatic line breaks:
44718 \SpecialChar nobreakdash
44722 \begin_layout Description
44724 \begin_inset space ~
44727 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur:
44728 \SpecialChar breakableslash
44732 \begin_layout Description
44734 \begin_inset space ~
44737 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
44739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44743 \begin_inset space \space{}
44746 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
44747 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
44754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44757 To insert a fraction use the command
44762 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
44766 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
44772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44775 The visible space is hereby the character before the
44782 \begin_layout Description
44784 \begin_inset space ~
44787 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign:
44788 \SpecialChar menuseparator
44792 \begin_layout Description
44794 \begin_inset space ~
44798 \begin_inset Index idx
44803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44810 \begin_inset Index idx
44815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44817 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44831 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these symbols.
44832 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44838 \begin_inset Index idx
44843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44846 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44861 \begin_inset Newline newline
44864 More information about this feature can be found in the
44870 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
44876 \begin_layout Description
44877 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
44882 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
44886 \begin_layout Subsection
44890 \begin_layout Standard
44891 Opens a submenu with the following options:
44894 \begin_layout Description
44895 Superscript Inserts a superscript:
44897 \begin_inset script superscript
44899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44909 \begin_layout Description
44910 Subscript Inserts a subscript:
44912 \begin_inset script subscript
44914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44923 \begin_layout Description
44925 \begin_inset space ~
44928 Space Inserts a non-breaking space as described in section
44929 \begin_inset space ~
44933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44935 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
44943 \begin_layout Description
44945 \begin_inset space ~
44948 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
44949 \begin_inset space ~
44953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44955 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
44963 \begin_layout Description
44965 \begin_inset space ~
44968 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
44969 \begin_inset space ~
44973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44975 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
44983 \begin_layout Description
44985 \begin_inset space ~
44988 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
44989 \begin_inset space ~
44993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44995 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
45003 \begin_layout Description
45005 \begin_inset space ~
45008 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
45009 \begin_inset space ~
45013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45015 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
45023 \begin_layout Description
45025 \begin_inset space ~
45028 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
45029 \begin_inset space ~
45033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45035 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
45043 \begin_layout Description
45044 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
45045 \begin_inset space ~
45049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45051 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
45059 \begin_layout Description
45061 \begin_inset space ~
45064 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
45065 \begin_inset space ~
45069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45071 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
45079 \begin_layout Description
45081 \begin_inset space ~
45084 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
45085 \begin_inset space ~
45089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45091 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
45099 \begin_layout Description
45101 \begin_inset space ~
45105 \begin_inset space ~
45108 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible in the output.
45110 \begin_inset space ~
45114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45116 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
45124 for a usage example.
45127 \begin_layout Description
45129 \begin_inset space ~
45133 \begin_inset space ~
45136 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
45137 \begin_inset space ~
45141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45143 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
45151 \begin_layout Description
45153 \begin_inset space ~
45156 Break Inserts a forced line break that justifies the remaining text as described in section
45157 \begin_inset space ~
45161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45163 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
45171 \begin_layout Description
45173 \begin_inset space ~
45176 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
45177 \begin_inset space ~
45181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45183 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
45191 \begin_layout Description
45193 \begin_inset space ~
45196 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page,
45197 as described in section
45198 \begin_inset space ~
45202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45204 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
45212 \begin_layout Description
45214 \begin_inset space ~
45218 \begin_inset space ~
45221 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45222 to prevent a page break at the given position.
45224 \begin_inset space ~
45228 \begin_inset space ~
45232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45234 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
45242 \begin_layout Description
45244 \begin_inset space ~
45247 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
45248 \begin_inset space ~
45252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45254 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
45262 \begin_layout Description
45264 \begin_inset space ~
45268 \begin_inset space ~
45271 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
45272 \begin_inset space ~
45276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45278 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
45286 \begin_layout Subsection
45290 \begin_layout Standard
45291 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
45292 The submenu allows you to insert
45295 \begin_layout Description
45297 \begin_inset space ~
45300 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
45303 \begin_layout Description
45305 \begin_inset space ~
45309 \begin_inset space ~
45312 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last save)
45315 \begin_layout Description
45317 \begin_inset space ~
45320 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
45323 \begin_layout Description
45325 \begin_inset space ~
45328 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
45331 \begin_layout Description
45333 \begin_inset space ~
45337 \begin_inset space ~
45340 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last save)
45343 \begin_layout Description
45345 \begin_inset space ~
45348 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
45351 \begin_layout Description
45353 \begin_inset space ~
45357 \begin_inset space ~
45361 \begin_inset space ~
45364 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
45367 \begin_layout Description
45369 \begin_inset space ~
45373 \begin_inset space ~
45376 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
45378 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
45381 \begin_layout Description
45383 \begin_inset space ~
45386 Name inserts the user name as specified in
45388 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45389 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45395 \begin_layout Description
45397 \begin_inset space ~
45400 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
45402 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45403 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45409 \begin_layout Description
45410 Other\SpecialChar ldots
45411 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
45414 \begin_layout Subsection
45417 List/Contents/References
45420 \begin_layout Standard
45421 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
45425 \begin_inset space ~
45449 are described in section
45450 \begin_inset space ~
45454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45456 reference "sec:toc"
45466 is described in section
45467 \begin_inset space ~
45471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45473 reference "sec:Index"
45483 is described in section
45484 \begin_inset space ~
45488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45490 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
45497 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45500 is described in section
45501 \begin_inset space ~
45505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45507 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45515 \begin_layout Subsection
45519 \begin_layout Standard
45521 as described in section
45522 \begin_inset space ~
45526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45528 reference "sec:Floats"
45533 and in detail the chapter
45540 \begin_inset space ~
45548 \begin_layout Subsection
45552 \begin_layout Standard
45554 described in section
45555 \begin_inset space ~
45559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45561 reference "sec:Notes"
45569 \begin_layout Subsection
45573 \begin_layout Standard
45574 Inserts a branch inset,
45576 and allowing you to create and insert a new branch.
45577 Branches are described in section
45578 \begin_inset space ~
45582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45584 reference "sec:Branches"
45592 \begin_layout Subsection
45596 \begin_layout Standard
45597 Inserts document class-specific insets.
45598 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain document class.
45599 An example is the document class
45603 with three custom insets.
45606 Flex insets and InsetLayout
45610 Installing New Document Classes,
45611 The Layout file format
45617 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
45620 \begin_layout Subsection
45622 \begin_inset Index idx
45627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45636 \begin_layout Standard
45637 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files in your document.
45638 For more information see chapter
45640 External Document Parts
45643 \begin_inset space ~
45649 \begin_layout Subsection
45651 \begin_inset Index idx
45656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45665 \begin_layout Standard
45666 Inserts a box in a certain style.
45667 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
45674 \begin_inset space ~
45682 \begin_layout Subsection
45686 \begin_layout Standard
45691 dialog as described in section
45692 \begin_inset space ~
45696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45698 reference "sec:Bibliography"
45706 \begin_layout Subsection
45710 \begin_layout Standard
45715 as described in section
45716 \begin_inset space ~
45720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45722 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45730 \begin_layout Subsection
45734 \begin_layout Standard
45739 as described in section
45740 \begin_inset space ~
45744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45746 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45754 \begin_layout Subsection
45756 \begin_inset Index idx
45761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45768 \begin_inset Index idx
45773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45775 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45785 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45802 \begin_layout Standard
45803 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
45804 Floats are described in section
45805 \begin_inset space ~
45809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45811 reference "sec:Floats"
45817 captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
45819 Multi-page Table Captions
45824 \begin_inset space ~
45832 \begin_layout Subsection
45836 \begin_layout Standard
45837 Inserts an index entry as described in section
45838 \begin_inset space ~
45842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45844 reference "sec:Index"
45852 \begin_layout Subsection
45856 \begin_layout Standard
45857 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
45858 \begin_inset space ~
45862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45864 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
45872 \begin_layout Subsection
45876 \begin_layout Standard
45877 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
45878 Tables are described in section
45879 \begin_inset space ~
45883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45885 reference "sec:Tables"
45890 and in detail in the chapter
45897 \begin_inset space ~
45905 \begin_layout Subsection
45909 \begin_layout Standard
45915 Graphics are described in section
45916 \begin_inset space ~
45920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45922 reference "sec:Graphics"
45930 \begin_layout Subsection
45934 \begin_layout Standard
45935 Inserts a URL as described in section
45936 \begin_inset space ~
45940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45942 reference "subsec:URLs"
45950 \begin_layout Subsection
45954 \begin_layout Standard
45955 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
45956 \begin_inset space ~
45960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45962 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
45970 \begin_layout Subsection
45974 \begin_layout Standard
45975 Inserts a footnote as described in section
45976 \begin_inset space ~
45980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45982 reference "sec:Footnotes"
45990 \begin_layout Subsection
45994 \begin_layout Standard
45995 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
45996 \begin_inset space ~
46000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46002 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
46010 \begin_layout Subsection
46013 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
46016 \begin_layout Standard
46017 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
46019 \begin_inset space ~
46023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46025 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
46030 for an explanation.
46033 \begin_layout Subsection
46037 \begin_layout Standard
46038 Is only visible if the cursor is in front,
46039 in or behind a section heading,
46040 title or caption of a float.
46041 Inserts a short title as described in section
46042 \begin_inset space ~
46046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46048 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
46056 \begin_layout Subsection
46061 \begin_layout Standard
46062 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
46063 Code box as described in section
46064 \begin_inset space ~
46068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46070 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
46078 \begin_layout Subsection
46080 \begin_inset Index idx
46085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46094 \begin_layout Standard
46095 Inserts a program listings box.
46096 Program listings are explained in the chapter
46098 Program Code Listings
46103 \begin_inset space ~
46111 \begin_layout Subsection
46115 \begin_layout Standard
46116 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
46117 \begin_inset space ~
46121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46123 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46131 \begin_layout Section
46133 \begin_inset Index idx
46138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46140 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46157 \begin_layout Standard
46158 This menu lists the existing chapters,
46163 \begin_inset space ~
46166 of the current document.
46167 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
46170 \begin_layout Subsection
46174 \begin_layout Standard
46175 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
46176 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have to jump,
46179 \begin_inset space ~
46183 To create bookmarks for this example,
46185 \begin_inset space ~
46188 2.5 and use the submenu
46191 \begin_inset space ~
46195 \begin_inset space ~
46202 \begin_inset space ~
46208 \begin_inset space ~
46212 \begin_inset space ~
46218 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by the key bindings
46221 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
46227 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
46230 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
46233 \begin_layout Standard
46237 \begin_inset space ~
46242 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
46245 \begin_inset space ~
46250 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
46253 \begin_layout Subsection
46259 \begin_layout Standard
46260 Jump to the next note,
46262 or cross-reference after the current cursor position.
46265 \begin_layout Subsection
46269 \begin_layout Standard
46270 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
46271 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
46272 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
46275 \begin_inset space ~
46279 \begin_inset space ~
46287 \begin_layout Subsection
46291 \begin_layout Standard
46292 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
46295 The \SpecialChar LyX
46296 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
46298 \begin_inset space ~
46306 \begin_inset space ~
46311 manual for a detailed description.
46314 \begin_layout Section
46316 \begin_inset Index idx
46321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46323 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46340 \begin_layout Subsection
46344 \begin_layout Standard
46345 Change Tracking is described in section
46346 \begin_inset space ~
46350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46352 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46360 \begin_layout Subsection
46368 \begin_layout Standard
46369 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
46370 by viewing or exporting a document,
46371 this menu will be enabled.
46372 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46374 You can go to the next error or the next warning,
46376 copy something to the clipboard or update the view.
46377 \begin_inset Newline newline
46380 With the help of the logfile,
46381 experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46385 \begin_layout Standard
46388 Open Containing Directory
46390 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
46391 's temporary folder for the document.
46392 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
46393 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
46394 For example some journals require to send the
46398 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46402 \begin_layout Subsection
46403 Start Appendix Here
46406 \begin_layout Standard
46407 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position as described in section
46408 \begin_inset space ~
46412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46414 reference "sec:Appendices"
46422 \begin_layout Subsection
46424 \begin_inset space ~
46430 \begin_layout Standard
46431 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as default output format for the document (menu
46433 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46434 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46435 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
46437 \begin_inset space ~
46441 \begin_inset space ~
46448 \begin_inset space ~
46452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46454 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
46459 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
46462 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46463 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46465 \begin_inset space ~
46468 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46470 \begin_inset space ~
46473 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46475 \begin_inset space ~
46479 \begin_inset space ~
46486 \begin_inset space ~
46490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46492 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46497 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
46498 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
46500 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46501 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46503 \begin_inset space ~
46506 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46508 \begin_inset space ~
46511 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46516 \begin_inset space ~
46520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46522 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46528 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
46529 when it is first configured.
46530 The default output format is
46533 \begin_inset space ~
46541 \begin_layout Subsection
46542 View (Other Formats)
46545 \begin_layout Standard
46546 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
46547 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the actual document with an external program.
46548 The menu entries are not the same on all installations —
46549 it depends on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46550 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
46552 All possible formats are listed in section
46553 \begin_inset space ~
46557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46559 reference "subsec:Export"
46565 You should at least see the menu entry
46571 you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46573 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
46575 \begin_inset space ~
46579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46581 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
46587 \begin_inset Index idx
46592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46593 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
46602 \begin_layout Standard
46603 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
46604 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
46606 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46607 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46609 \begin_inset space ~
46612 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46614 \begin_inset space ~
46617 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46622 \begin_inset space ~
46626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46628 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46634 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
46635 when it is first configured.
46638 \begin_layout Subsection
46640 \begin_inset space ~
46646 \begin_layout Standard
46647 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
46650 \begin_layout Subsection
46651 Update (Other Formats)
46654 \begin_layout Standard
46655 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of your document without opening a new viewer window.
46658 \begin_layout Subsection
46659 View Master Document
46662 \begin_layout Standard
46663 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
46665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46679 \begin_inset space ~
46684 manual for more information on this topic).
46685 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
46687 if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a book,
46691 \begin_inset space ~
46695 \begin_inset space ~
46700 generates the output of the whole book,
46705 will just output the chapter alone.
46708 \begin_layout Standard
46709 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
46711 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46712 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46713 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
46715 \begin_inset space ~
46719 \begin_inset space ~
46726 \begin_inset space ~
46730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46732 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
46737 ) or in the preferences (menu
46739 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46740 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46742 \begin_inset space ~
46745 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46747 \begin_inset space ~
46750 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46752 \begin_inset space ~
46756 \begin_inset space ~
46763 \begin_inset space ~
46767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46769 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46777 \begin_layout Subsection
46778 Update Master Document
46781 \begin_layout Standard
46782 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
46784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46798 \begin_inset space ~
46803 manual for more information on this topic).
46804 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
46807 \begin_layout Standard
46808 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
46810 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46811 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46812 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
46814 \begin_inset space ~
46818 \begin_inset space ~
46825 \begin_inset space ~
46829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46831 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
46836 ) or in the preferences (menu
46838 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46839 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46841 \begin_inset space ~
46844 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46846 \begin_inset space ~
46849 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46851 \begin_inset space ~
46855 \begin_inset space ~
46862 \begin_inset space ~
46866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46868 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46876 \begin_layout Subsection
46878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46880 name "subsec:Compressed"
46887 \begin_layout Standard
46888 Un/compresses the current document.
46889 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable compression (see the
46891 Additional Features
46893 manual for details).
46896 \begin_layout Subsection
46900 \begin_layout Standard
46901 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
46904 \begin_layout Subsection
46908 \begin_layout Standard
46909 The document settings are described in appendix
46910 \begin_inset space ~
46914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46916 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
46924 \begin_layout Section
46926 \begin_inset Index idx
46931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46933 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46950 \begin_layout Subsection
46954 \begin_layout Standard
46955 Spell checking is explained in section
46956 \begin_inset space ~
46960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46962 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
46970 \begin_layout Subsection
46974 \begin_layout Standard
46975 The thesaurus is described in section
46976 \begin_inset space ~
46980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46982 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
46990 \begin_layout Subsection
46992 \begin_inset Index idx
46997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47004 \begin_inset Index idx
47009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47018 \begin_layout Standard
47019 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted document part.
47022 \begin_layout Subsection
47028 \begin_inset Index idx
47033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47034 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
47043 \begin_layout Standard
47044 Generates with the help of the program
47046 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
47049 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
47050 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
47051 This feature is not available on Windows.
47054 \begin_layout Subsection
47060 \begin_inset Index idx
47065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47075 \begin_layout Standard
47076 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47081 \begin_inset space ~
47086 to see the full filename paths.
47089 \begin_layout Subsection
47091 \begin_inset Index idx
47096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47105 \begin_layout Standard
47106 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
47107 files as described in section
47108 \begin_inset space ~
47112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47114 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
47122 \begin_layout Subsection
47124 \begin_inset Index idx
47129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47132 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47142 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
47145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47146 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
47158 \begin_inset Index idx
47163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47164 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
47173 \begin_layout Standard
47174 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
47178 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47179 -packages and programs it needs;
47181 \begin_inset space ~
47185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47187 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
47195 \begin_layout Subsection
47199 \begin_layout Standard
47204 dialog as described in detail in appendix
47205 \begin_inset space ~
47209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47211 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47219 \begin_layout Section
47221 \begin_inset Index idx
47226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47228 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47245 \begin_layout Standard
47246 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
47247 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
47249 If a file is not available in this language,
47250 the English version will be listed.
47253 \begin_layout Standard
47257 \begin_inset space ~
47262 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
47263 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47264 packages and classes found by \SpecialChar LyX
47266 \begin_inset space ~
47270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47272 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
47280 \begin_layout Standard
47284 \begin_inset space ~
47289 gives information about the copyright,
47290 the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
47291 version you are using.
47294 \begin_layout Section
47296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47298 name "sec:Toolbars"
47305 \begin_layout Standard
47306 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
47307 \begin_inset space ~
47311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47313 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
47321 \begin_layout Standard
47322 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
47323 This is described in the
47325 Additional Features
47330 \begin_layout Subsection
47332 \begin_inset Index idx
47337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47339 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47356 \begin_layout Standard
47357 \begin_inset Graphics
47358 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
47366 \begin_layout Standard
47367 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47373 \begin_layout Standard
47374 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
47378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47390 \begin_inset Note Note
47393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47394 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
47399 manual for more information.
47407 \begin_layout Standard
47408 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47414 \begin_layout Standard
47415 \begin_inset Tabular
47416 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
47417 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
47418 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47419 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47425 \begin_inset Graphics
47426 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
47436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47440 pull-down box for the environments
47453 \begin_layout Standard
47454 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
47460 \begin_layout Standard
47462 \begin_inset Tabular
47463 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
47464 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
47465 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
47466 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
47467 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47490 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47497 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47520 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47527 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47550 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47557 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47566 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
47574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47580 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47587 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47596 arg "spelling-continuously"
47604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47608 Spellcheck continuously
47614 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47637 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47644 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47667 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47697 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47704 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47727 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47734 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47757 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47762 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47769 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47778 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
47786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47792 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47811 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47818 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
47826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47832 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47860 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
47868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47874 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47875 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
47882 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47907 arg "dialog-show character"
47916 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47937 Set text to noun style,
47941 arg "dialog-show character"
47950 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47957 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
47965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47971 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47978 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47998 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48021 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48022 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
48024 \begin_inset space ~
48033 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48042 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
48050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48056 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48063 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48070 arg "tabular-insert"
48078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48084 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48098 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
48106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48128 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
48136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48140 Toggle outline window on/off,
48143 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48150 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48159 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
48167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48171 Toggle math toolbar on/off
48177 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48186 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
48194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48198 Toggle table toolbar on/off
48211 \begin_layout Subsection
48213 \begin_inset Index idx
48218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48220 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48237 \begin_layout Standard
48238 \begin_inset Graphics
48239 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
48247 \begin_layout Standard
48248 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
48254 \begin_layout Standard
48255 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
48258 \begin_layout Standard
48259 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
48265 \begin_layout Standard
48266 \begin_inset Tabular
48267 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
48268 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
48269 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
48270 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
48271 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48298 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48307 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
48315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48325 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48334 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
48342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48361 arg "layout-toggle List"
48369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48379 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48388 arg "layout-toggle Description"
48396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48406 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48415 arg "depth-increment"
48423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48429 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48431 \begin_inset space ~
48435 \begin_inset space ~
48444 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48453 arg "depth-decrement"
48461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48467 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48469 \begin_inset space ~
48473 \begin_inset space ~
48482 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48491 arg "float-insert figure"
48499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48505 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48506 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
48513 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48522 arg "float-insert table"
48530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48536 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48537 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
48544 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48567 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48583 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
48591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48597 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48604 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48613 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
48621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48627 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48657 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48659 \begin_inset space ~
48668 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48677 arg "nomencl-insert"
48685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48691 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48693 \begin_inset space ~
48702 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48711 arg "footnote-insert"
48719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48725 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48732 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48741 arg "marginalnote-insert"
48749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48755 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48757 \begin_inset space ~
48766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48789 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48790 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
48792 \begin_inset space ~
48801 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48810 arg "box-insert Frameless"
48818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48824 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48831 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48854 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48861 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48884 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48886 \begin_inset space ~
48895 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48904 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
48912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48918 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48919 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
48926 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48935 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
48943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48950 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48952 \begin_inset space ~
48961 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48970 arg "dialog-show character"
48978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48984 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48986 \begin_inset space ~
48989 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
48996 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49005 arg "textstyle-apply"
49013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49017 Format text using the recent settings in the
49020 arg "dialog-show character"
49029 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49038 arg "layout-paragraph"
49046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49052 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49054 \begin_inset space ~
49063 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49072 arg "thesaurus-entry"
49080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49086 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49100 \begin_layout Subsection
49101 View/Update Toolbar
49102 \begin_inset Index idx
49107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49109 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49126 \begin_layout Standard
49127 \begin_inset Graphics
49128 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
49135 \begin_layout Standard
49136 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
49142 \begin_layout Standard
49143 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
49146 \begin_layout Standard
49147 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
49153 \begin_layout Standard
49154 \begin_inset Tabular
49155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
49156 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
49157 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
49158 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
49159 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49182 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49189 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49198 arg "buffer-update"
49206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49212 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49219 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49228 arg "master-buffer-view"
49236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49242 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49244 \begin_inset space ~
49248 \begin_inset space ~
49257 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49266 arg "master-buffer-update"
49274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49280 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49282 \begin_inset space ~
49286 \begin_inset space ~
49295 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49304 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
49312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49318 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49319 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49320 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
49321 Synchronize with Output
49327 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49348 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49349 View (Other Formats)
49355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49362 arg "update-others"
49370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49376 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49377 Update (Other Formats)
49390 \begin_layout Subsection
49394 \begin_layout Standard
49395 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
49396 \begin_inset space ~
49400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49402 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49409 \begin_inset Index idx
49414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49416 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49433 \begin_inset space ~
49438 manual and the math macro toolbar
49439 \begin_inset Index idx
49444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49446 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49467 \begin_layout Chapter
49468 The Document Settings
49469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49471 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
49476 \begin_inset Index idx
49481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49483 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49500 \begin_layout Standard
49504 \begin_inset space ~
49509 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and is called with the menu
49511 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49515 You can save your document settings as default with the
49517 Save as Document Defaults
49519 button in any dialog.
49520 This will create a template named
49524 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
49525 when you create a new document without using a template.
49528 \begin_layout Standard
49533 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
49534 This affects mostly class options,
49535 the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
49538 \begin_layout Standard
49539 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
49540 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while to find the one you are looking for.
49541 To find a setting quicker,
49542 you can use the search field which is above the submenus of the dialog.
49544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49548 \begin_inset space \space{}
49552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49560 you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
49561 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
49562 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
49565 \begin_layout Section
49569 \begin_layout Standard
49570 Here you set the document class,
49573 and a master document.
49574 Document classes are described in section
49575 \begin_inset space ~
49579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49581 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
49589 \begin_layout Standard
49593 \begin_inset space ~
49598 you can load you own layout-file,
49599 that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
49604 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
49605 as a layout for a document class.
49606 For more about layout-files,
49609 Installing New Document Classes,
49610 Types of Layout Files
49619 \begin_layout Standard
49620 Some classes use special class options by default.
49621 If this is the case,
49622 they are listed in the field
49626 and you can decide to use them or not.
49627 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for,
49628 it is recommended you leave them untouched.
49633 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49635 color and page layout packages.
49641 the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49643 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are doing.
49647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49648 When you want to use one of the following drivers
49649 \begin_inset Newline newline
49663 \begin_inset Newline newline
49666 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
49673 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49675 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
49688 \begin_layout Standard
49693 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
49694 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
49695 in the background if the child document is opened without its master.
49696 This way child documents are always compilable.
49697 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
49704 \begin_inset space ~
49712 \begin_layout Standard
49713 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49723 \begin_inset Index idx
49728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49731 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49746 \begin_inset Index idx
49751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49754 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49768 for cross-references,
49770 \begin_inset space ~
49774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49776 reference "sec:Cross-References"
49784 \begin_layout Section
49788 \begin_layout Standard
49789 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
49790 Please refer to the section
49793 \begin_inset space ~
49801 \begin_inset space ~
49806 manual for details.
49809 \begin_layout Section
49813 \begin_layout Standard
49814 Modules are explained in section
49815 \begin_inset space ~
49819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49821 reference "subsec:Modules"
49829 \begin_layout Section
49833 \begin_layout Standard
49835 \begin_inset space ~
49839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49841 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
49849 \begin_layout Section
49853 \begin_layout Standard
49854 The document font settings are described in section
49855 \begin_inset space ~
49859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49861 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
49869 \begin_layout Section
49873 \begin_layout Standard
49874 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
49886 \begin_inset space ~
49891 and whether it should be a
49894 \begin_inset space ~
49899 can also be specified here.
49902 \begin_layout Standard
49903 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
49904 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
49905 That would be impractical,
49907 and is not part of the WYSIWYM concept.
49909 it will be as you specified in the output.
49912 \begin_layout Standard
49915 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
49918 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
49919 justifies the text on screen.
49920 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
49924 \begin_layout Standard
49933 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
49936 \begin_layout Section
49940 \begin_layout Standard
49941 This dialog is described in sections
49942 \begin_inset space ~
49946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49948 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
49954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49956 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
49964 \begin_layout Section
49968 \begin_layout Standard
49969 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
49970 \begin_inset space ~
49974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49976 reference "subsec:Margins"
49984 \begin_layout Section
49986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49988 name "sec:Language-encodings"
49993 \begin_inset Index idx
49998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50000 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50017 \begin_layout Standard
50018 The document language and quote styles are set here.
50019 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
50020 (the \SpecialChar LyX
50021 file is always encoded in utf8).
50022 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
50023 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
50024 -command is not known for a particular character).
50027 \begin_layout Standard
50030 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
50031 files in Unicode – or utf8,
50032 for that matter (which is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
50033 's default encoding).
50034 This should normally fit your needs,
50035 since \SpecialChar LaTeX
50036 's Unicode support covers the characters of most scripts.
50037 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive,
50038 so there might be cases where using one of the traditional,
50040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50048 encodings is necessary.
50051 \begin_layout Standard
50053 provides support for these traditional encodings.
50056 Traditional (auto-selected)
50064 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for the given language(s).If the document contains text in more than one language you thus may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50069 \begin_layout Standard
50071 you can also select
50076 which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
50077 Note that this encoding is then used for
50082 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation below).
50085 \begin_layout Standard
50090 selection in the next dropdown menu does what it states:
50091 it prevents \SpecialChar LyX
50092 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50098 \begin_inset Index idx
50103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50106 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50121 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
50123 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
50125 Note that this option is only available for the standard
50131 Traditional (auto-selected)
50136 \begin_layout Standard
50140 \begin_inset space ~
50145 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50146 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation of strings like
50147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50155 The possible settings are:
50158 \begin_layout Description
50159 Default uses the language package that is selected in
50161 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50162 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50166 \begin_inset space ~
50170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50172 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50180 \begin_layout Description
50181 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export format you will use.
50182 In many cases this will be
50187 \begin_inset Index idx
50192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50195 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50210 If the newer package
50215 \begin_inset Index idx
50220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50223 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50237 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50238 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50239 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
50241 this package will be used instead of
50248 \begin_layout Description
50250 \begin_inset space ~
50261 would be more appropriate.
50264 \begin_layout Description
50265 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
50266 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
50270 (for German texts),
50274 \begin_inset Newline newline
50279 usepackage{ngerman}
50282 \begin_layout Description
50283 None will not use a language package.
50284 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
50287 \begin_layout Standard
50288 Here is a list with the important encodings:
50291 \begin_layout Description
50292 ASCII the ASCII encoding,
50293 covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
50295 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
50297 which may result in a big file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
50298 -commands are needed.
50301 \begin_layout Description
50303 \begin_inset space ~
50307 \begin_inset space ~
50310 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
50313 \begin_layout Description
50315 \begin_inset space ~
50319 \begin_inset space ~
50322 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
50325 \begin_layout Description
50327 \begin_inset space ~
50330 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
50333 \begin_layout Description
50335 \begin_inset space ~
50339 \begin_inset space ~
50342 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian,
50343 Latvian and Lithuanian,
50344 the same as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
50347 \begin_layout Description
50349 \begin_inset space ~
50353 \begin_inset space ~
50356 8859-13) for Estonian,
50357 Latvian and Lithuanian,
50358 a superset of the ISO-8859-4 encoding
50361 \begin_layout Description
50363 \begin_inset space ~
50367 \begin_inset space ~
50370 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian,
50371 Latvian and Lithuanian,
50372 a subset of the ISO-8859-13 encoding
50375 \begin_layout Description
50377 \begin_inset space ~
50381 \begin_inset space ~
50385 \begin_inset space ~
50388 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
50389 \begin_inset space ~
50395 \begin_layout Description
50397 \begin_inset space ~
50401 \begin_inset space ~
50405 \begin_inset space ~
50408 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian,
50415 Slovak and Slovenian
50418 \begin_layout Description
50420 \begin_inset space ~
50424 \begin_inset space ~
50427 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese,
50428 used especially on UNIX OSes,
50429 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
50430 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50431 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
50432 \begin_inset space ~
50436 \begin_inset space ~
50442 \begin_layout Description
50444 \begin_inset space ~
50448 \begin_inset space ~
50451 (GBK) for simplified Chinese,
50452 is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 except for the Euro currency sign,
50453 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
50454 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50455 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
50456 \begin_inset space ~
50460 \begin_inset space ~
50466 \begin_layout Description
50468 \begin_inset space ~
50472 \begin_inset space ~
50475 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
50478 \begin_layout Description
50480 \begin_inset space ~
50484 \begin_inset space ~
50487 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
50490 \begin_layout Description
50492 \begin_inset space ~
50496 \begin_inset space ~
50499 8859-5) covers Belorussian,
50502 Serbian and Ukrainian
50505 \begin_layout Description
50507 \begin_inset space ~
50510 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
50513 \begin_layout Description
50515 \begin_inset space ~
50518 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
50521 \begin_layout Description
50523 \begin_inset space ~
50527 \begin_inset space ~
50530 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
50533 \begin_layout Description
50535 \begin_inset space ~
50539 \begin_inset space ~
50545 \begin_layout Description
50547 \begin_inset space ~
50551 \begin_inset space ~
50554 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew,
50555 a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
50558 \begin_layout Description
50560 \begin_inset space ~
50564 \begin_inset space ~
50570 \begin_layout Description
50572 \begin_inset space ~
50576 \begin_inset space ~
50579 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
50580 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50586 \begin_inset Index idx
50591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50594 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50610 set the document language to
50615 \begin_layout Description
50617 \begin_inset space ~
50621 \begin_inset space ~
50624 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
50625 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50632 set the document language to
50635 \begin_inset space ~
50641 \begin_layout Description
50643 \begin_inset space ~
50647 \begin_inset space ~
50650 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
50651 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50657 \begin_inset Index idx
50662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50665 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50681 set the document language to
50686 \begin_layout Description
50688 \begin_inset space ~
50692 \begin_inset space ~
50695 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
50696 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50703 set the document language to
50708 \begin_layout Description
50710 \begin_inset space ~
50714 \begin_inset space ~
50717 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese,
50718 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50725 set the document language to
50730 \begin_layout Description
50732 \begin_inset space ~
50735 (EUC-KR) for Korean
50738 \begin_layout Description
50740 \begin_inset space ~
50744 \begin_inset space ~
50748 \begin_inset space ~
50751 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto,
50753 Maltese and Turkish
50756 \begin_layout Description
50758 \begin_inset space ~
50762 \begin_inset space ~
50766 \begin_inset space ~
50769 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian,
50778 Romanian and Slovenian,
50779 is designed to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
50782 \begin_layout Description
50784 \begin_inset space ~
50788 \begin_inset space ~
50794 \begin_layout Description
50796 \begin_inset space ~
50800 \begin_inset space ~
50803 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish,
50804 is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
50807 \begin_layout Description
50809 \begin_inset space ~
50813 \begin_inset space ~
50816 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50822 \begin_inset Index idx
50827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50830 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50844 (for the languages Chinese,
50845 Japanese and Korean).
50846 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
50847 with the default encoding (
50849 Unicode (utf8) [default]
50855 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
50856 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
50859 \begin_layout Description
50861 \begin_inset space ~
50869 \begin_inset space ~
50872 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
50879 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50883 which use Unicode directly,
50884 without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50891 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50892 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50894 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
50897 \begin_layout Description
50899 \begin_inset space ~
50903 \begin_inset space ~
50906 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50912 \begin_inset Index idx
50917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50920 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50936 Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
50937 This used to be more comprehensive than
50940 \begin_inset space ~
50946 but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
50949 \begin_layout Description
50951 \begin_inset space ~
50954 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50960 \begin_inset Index idx
50965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50968 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50983 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
50984 with the default encoding (
50986 Unicode (utf8) [default]
50992 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
50993 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
50996 \begin_layout Description
50998 \begin_inset space ~
51002 \begin_inset space ~
51006 \begin_inset space ~
51009 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
51010 \begin_inset space ~
51016 \begin_layout Description
51018 \begin_inset space ~
51022 \begin_inset space ~
51026 \begin_inset space ~
51029 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian,
51044 Spanish and Swedish;
51045 better use the ISO-8859-15 encoding instead
51048 \begin_layout Description
51050 \begin_inset space ~
51054 \begin_inset space ~
51058 \begin_inset space ~
51061 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding,
51062 but with the Euro currency sign,
51063 the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
51066 \begin_layout Section
51068 \begin_inset Index idx
51073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51075 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51090 \begin_inset Index idx
51095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51097 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51112 \begin_inset Index idx
51117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51119 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51134 \begin_inset Index idx
51139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51141 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51158 \begin_layout Standard
51159 Here you can alter the font color for the
51168 \begin_inset space ~
51174 light grey)for the background color for the
51182 \begin_inset space ~
51193 sets the color back to the default.
51196 \begin_layout Standard
51197 Clicking any button showing
51205 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
51206 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them later more quickly.
51209 \begin_layout Standard
51214 \begin_inset space ~
51219 font color and use the option
51222 \begin_inset space ~
51227 in the document settings under
51230 \begin_inset space ~
51236 you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
51237 \begin_inset space ~
51241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51243 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
51251 \begin_layout Standard
51252 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
51258 \begin_layout Standard
51262 \begin_inset space ~
51271 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as \SpecialChar TeX
51273 \begin_inset space ~
51276 Code after a forced page break:
51279 \begin_layout Itemize
51280 For the page color:
51281 \begin_inset Newline newline
51288 pagecolor{color name}
51291 \begin_layout Itemize
51292 For the text color:
51293 \begin_inset Newline newline
51303 \begin_layout Standard
51304 You are restricted to one of
51346 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
51353 \begin_inset space ~
51359 \begin_inset Newline newline
51362 If you have changed a text or background color,
51363 you can use the following names to refer to them:
51366 \begin_layout Itemize
51372 \begin_inset Newline newline
51377 page_backgroundcolor
51380 \begin_layout Itemize
51384 \begin_inset space ~
51390 \begin_inset Newline newline
51398 \begin_layout Itemize
51402 \begin_inset space ~
51408 \begin_inset Newline newline
51416 \begin_layout Itemize
51420 \begin_inset space ~
51426 \begin_inset Newline newline
51434 \begin_layout Standard
51435 To see how to define and use custom colors,
51439 \begin_inset space ~
51447 \begin_inset space ~
51455 \begin_layout Section
51459 \begin_layout Standard
51460 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
51461 \begin_inset space ~
51465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51467 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51476 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar,
51477 you can set here whether changes are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
51480 \begin_layout Standard
51482 you can advise \SpecialChar LyX
51483 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
51484 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
51487 \begin_layout Section
51491 \begin_layout Standard
51492 Here you can adjust the
51496 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
51500 as described in section
51501 \begin_inset space ~
51505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51507 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
51515 \begin_layout Standard
51516 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox at the bottom.
51517 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of this package can be used as well.
51518 The most common one are:
51521 \begin_layout Description
51522 right Line numbers to the right margin
51525 \begin_layout Description
51526 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages,
51530 \begin_layout Description
51531 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
51534 \begin_layout Description
51535 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
51538 \begin_layout Description
51539 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
51542 \begin_layout Description
51544 \begin_inset space ~
51547 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
51550 \begin_layout Section
51554 \begin_layout Standard
51555 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51561 \begin_inset Index idx
51566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51569 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51589 \begin_inset Index idx
51594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51597 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51616 \begin_inset Index idx
51621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51624 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51639 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51643 Sectioned bibliography
51645 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51651 \begin_inset Index idx
51656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51659 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51679 you can select the style files and specify further options.
51681 you can select a document-specific
51685 for the generation of the bibliography.
51686 For a further description of these possibilities see section
51687 \begin_inset space ~
51691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51693 reference "sec:Bibliography"
51701 \begin_layout Section
51705 \begin_layout Standard
51706 Here you can define the
51710 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see section
51711 \begin_inset space ~
51715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51717 reference "sec:Index"
51725 \begin_layout Section
51729 \begin_layout Standard
51730 The PDF properties are explained in section
51731 \begin_inset space ~
51735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51737 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
51745 \begin_layout Section
51749 \begin_layout Standard
51750 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
51751 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51757 \begin_inset Index idx
51762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51765 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51785 \begin_inset Index idx
51790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51793 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51813 \begin_inset Index idx
51818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51821 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51841 \begin_inset Index idx
51846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51849 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51869 \begin_inset Index idx
51874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51877 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51897 \begin_inset Index idx
51902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51905 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51925 \begin_inset Index idx
51930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51933 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51953 \begin_inset Index idx
51958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51961 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51981 \begin_inset Index idx
51986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51989 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52008 \begin_inset Index idx
52013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52016 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52031 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
52034 \begin_layout Description
52035 amsmath is needed for many constructs,
52036 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
52037 -errors in formulas,
52038 ensure that you have this enabled.
52041 \begin_layout Description
52042 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek letters,
52043 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
52044 -errors in formulas,
52045 ensure that you have this enabled.
52048 \begin_layout Description
52049 cancel is used for canceled formulas,
52053 \begin_inset space ~
52065 \begin_layout Description
52066 esint is used for special integral characters,
52070 \begin_inset space ~
52082 \begin_layout Description
52083 mathdots is used for special ellipses,
52095 \begin_layout Description
52096 mathtools is used for the math commands
52137 and labeled arrows,
52138 see the corresponding sections in the
52145 \begin_layout Description
52146 mhchem is used for chemical equations,
52149 Chemical Symbols and Equations
52158 \begin_layout Description
52159 stackrel is used for the math command
52177 \begin_layout Description
52178 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
52181 \begin_layout Description
52182 undertilde is used for the math command
52191 Accents for one Character
52200 \begin_layout Section
52204 \begin_layout Standard
52205 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
52208 \begin_layout Standard
52209 Details are described in the section
52212 \begin_inset space ~
52220 \begin_inset space ~
52228 \begin_layout Section
52232 \begin_layout Standard
52233 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
52235 Program Code Listings
52240 \begin_inset space ~
52248 \begin_layout Section
52252 \begin_layout Standard
52253 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
52262 set to be used and set the
52267 The itemize environment is described in section
52268 \begin_inset space ~
52272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52274 reference "sec:Itemize"
52282 \begin_layout Standard
52283 You can furthermore specify a
52286 \begin_inset space ~
52291 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52292 command of the desired character.
52293 For example to use the € sign,
52294 you have to insert the command
52301 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
52303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52307 \begin_inset space \space{}
52311 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
52321 To find the command for a math symbol,
52322 create a formula and hover the mouse over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
52325 \begin_layout Standard
52326 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
52329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52335 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
52336 -packages in the preamble (menu
52338 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52339 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52342 \begin_inset space ~
52348 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
52352 usepackage{textcomp}
52355 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
52359 usepackage{amssymb}
52369 \begin_layout Section
52373 \begin_layout Standard
52374 Branches are described in section
52375 \begin_inset space ~
52379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52381 reference "sec:Branches"
52389 \begin_layout Section
52391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52393 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
52400 \begin_layout Standard
52401 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
52404 \begin_layout Description
52406 \begin_inset space ~
52411 Save transient properties
52413 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
52414 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
52418 \begin_layout Itemize
52419 the activation of change tracking
52422 \begin_layout Itemize
52423 the output of tracked changes
52426 \begin_layout Itemize
52427 the recording of the document directory path.
52430 \begin_layout Standard
52431 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
52435 \begin_layout Description
52437 \begin_inset space ~
52441 \begin_inset space ~
52445 The format that is used when you enter
52446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52467 View Master Document
52468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52475 Update Master Document
52476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52483 menu or the toolbar.
52484 The default is set in
52486 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
52487 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
52489 \begin_inset space ~
52492 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
52497 \begin_inset space ~
52501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52503 reference "sec:File-Formats"
52511 \begin_layout Description
52513 \begin_inset space ~
52517 \begin_inset space ~
52520 Options offers settings for the
52528 \begin_layout Itemize
52531 Synchronize with Output
52536 \begin_inset space ~
52541 and allows to customize the macro used in this process (for a detailed description see section
52543 Reverse DVI/PDF search
52548 \begin_inset space ~
52556 \begin_layout Itemize
52559 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
52561 determines whether so-called
52562 \begin_inset Quotes els
52566 \begin_inset Quotes ers
52570 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
52571 \begin_inset Quotes els
52575 \begin_inset Quotes ers
52578 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
52579 (such as sections or captions),
52580 even if the corresponding insets are placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
52582 This setting is on by default,
52583 since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
52585 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic macros,
52586 you can uncheck this.
52587 If you don't know what we are talking about here,
52589 just leave it checked.
52593 \begin_layout Description
52595 \begin_inset space ~
52599 \begin_inset space ~
52602 Options offers settings for the export format
52610 \begin_inset space ~
52615 will assure that the output follows exactly version
52616 \begin_inset space ~
52619 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
52623 \begin_inset space ~
52628 settings are described in detail in section
52630 Math Output in XHTML
52635 \begin_inset space ~
52644 \begin_inset space ~
52648 \begin_inset space ~
52653 is used for the size of equations in the output.
52656 \begin_layout Description
52658 \begin_inset space ~
52662 \begin_inset space ~
52665 Options offers settings for the export format
52668 The details for the options are described in the chapter
52674 Additional Features
52679 \begin_layout Description
52683 \begin_layout Description
52685 \begin_inset space ~
52689 \begin_inset space ~
52693 \begin_inset space ~
52696 programs If this is switched on,
52702 option which is needed with some packages.
52703 Note that this comes with security risks,
52704 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
52707 \begin_layout Section
52715 \begin_layout Standard
52716 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
52717 -packages or to define \SpecialChar LaTeX
52719 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
52721 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are doing.
52724 \begin_layout Standard
52725 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52726 -syntax is given in section
52727 \begin_inset space ~
52731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52733 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
52741 \begin_layout Chapter
52747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52749 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
52754 \begin_inset Index idx
52759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52768 \begin_layout Standard
52769 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
52771 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
52775 It has the following submenus.
52778 \begin_layout Section
52782 \begin_layout Subsection
52786 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52787 User Interface File
52788 \begin_inset Index idx
52793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52795 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52810 \begin_inset Index idx
52815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52817 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52834 \begin_layout Standard
52835 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user interface (ui) file.
52836 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
52844 \begin_layout Description
52849 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
52852 \begin_layout Description
52859 the menu entries in popup context menus
52862 \begin_layout Description
52867 specifies the toolbar buttons
52870 \begin_layout Standard
52871 To create your own menu and toolbar layout,
52872 start with a copy of these files and edit the entries.
52875 \begin_layout Standard
52876 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward:
52890 entries must be finished with an explicit
52920 and in the case of the
52921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52933 The syntax for the entries is:
52936 \begin_layout Standard
52937 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
52943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52966 \begin_layout Standard
52968 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
52971 All the \SpecialChar LyX
52972 -functions are listed in the menu
52974 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
52976 \begin_inset space ~
52984 \begin_layout Standard
52985 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
52991 \begin_layout Standard
52993 assuming you use the menu
52995 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
52998 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks,
52999 you can add the line
53002 \begin_layout Standard
53003 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
53009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53027 \begin_layout Standard
53029 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
53033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53044 to have the sixth bookmark.
53047 \begin_layout Standard
53051 \begin_inset space ~
53056 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
53057 's toolbar buttons.
53058 The currently available icon sets are compared in
53059 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53062 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
53070 \begin_layout Standard
53074 \begin_inset space ~
53078 \begin_inset space ~
53083 allows you to change the look and feel of \SpecialChar LyX
53084 's user interface control elements.
53085 There may be different choices available on different operating systems.
53086 On certain operating systems some styles may support dark mode while others don't.
53087 In order to use dark mode in \SpecialChar LyX
53088 you may first need to enable it in your system's settings.
53091 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53095 \begin_layout Standard
53098 Enable tool tips in main work area
53100 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries or footnotes.
53103 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53107 \begin_layout Standard
53112 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
53113 should display in the menu
53115 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53117 \begin_inset space ~
53125 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53129 \begin_layout Standard
53130 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
53135 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
53136 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
53137 the text then appears centered.
53140 \begin_layout Subsection
53144 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53148 \begin_layout Standard
53151 Restore window layouts and geometries
53154 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in the last \SpecialChar LyX
53158 \begin_layout Standard
53161 Restore cursor positions
53163 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of the last session.
53166 \begin_layout Standard
53169 Load opened files from last session
53171 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
53175 \begin_layout Standard
53178 Clear all session information
53180 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
53181 sessions (cursor positions,
53182 names of last opened documents,
53186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53190 name "subsec:Backup documents"
53195 \begin_inset Index idx
53200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53202 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53219 \begin_layout Standard
53222 Backup original documents when saving
53224 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was saved the last time.
53225 It is stored in the
53228 \begin_inset space ~
53234 \begin_inset space ~
53238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53240 reference "sec:Paths"
53245 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
53248 \begin_inset space ~
53254 The backup file has the file extension
53258 and the same name than the original file.
53262 \begin_inset space ~
53268 the file has the full path in its file name,
53270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53285 !MyDir!MySubDir!Filename.lyx~
53290 \begin_layout Standard
53293 Make auto-save snapshots every X minutes
53296 LyX furthermore automatically saves snapshots of the current document (including unsaved changes) in the specified interval if there are unsaved changes.
53297 These files which are stored as
53301 in the document's directory are overwritten on each auto-save cycle and deleted when the document is closed normally.
53302 Should \SpecialChar LyX
53303 crash with unsaved changes and the restoration from the emergency file fail,
53304 this file can be used as a resort.
53307 \begin_layout Standard
53308 Please read section
53309 \begin_inset space ~
53313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53315 reference "sec:Safety-Nets"
53319 for more details on \SpecialChar LyX
53320 's diverse backup and safety mechanisms.
53323 \begin_layout Standard
53326 Save documents compressed by default
53328 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
53329 \begin_inset space ~
53333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53335 reference "subsec:Compressed"
53341 This applies to newly created documents only.
53342 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
53345 \begin_layout Standard
53348 Save the document directory path
53350 stores the path of the document in the \SpecialChar LyX
53352 This is particularly handy if you have included files (such as graphics or child documents) which are referred to with relative paths.
53353 The option then allows moving the document elsewhere and still finding these included files if they are still in their original directories.
53356 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53357 Windows & work area
53360 \begin_layout Standard
53363 Open documents in tabs
53366 every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
53370 \begin_layout Standard
53375 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
53380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53382 \begin_inset space ~
53386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53388 reference "sec:Paths"
53393 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
53402 documents will be opened in the same running instance of \SpecialChar LyX
53404 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
53405 instance is created for each file.
53408 \begin_layout Standard
53411 Single close-tab button
53414 there will only be one close button (
53424 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
53425 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
53426 Regardless of this option,
53427 one can always close a tab by middle-clicking it in the tab bar.
53430 \begin_layout Standard
53431 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
53434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53440 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
53441 before the change takes effect.
53449 \begin_layout Standard
53454 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view is closed.
53455 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
53457 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
53461 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several instances of \SpecialChar LyX
53462 and only want to close the view in once instance.
53465 \begin_layout Subsection
53467 \begin_inset Index idx
53472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53474 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53491 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
53498 \begin_layout Standard
53499 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
53503 \begin_layout Standard
53504 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
53507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53513 This section only deals with the fonts
53517 the \SpecialChar LyX
53519 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts,
53520 and set in the menu
53522 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53523 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
53534 \begin_layout Standard
53554 (depends on the system) as its
53557 \begin_inset space ~
53573 \begin_layout Standard
53574 You can change the font size with the
53581 \begin_layout Standard
53586 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
53588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53591 points have the size of 1
53592 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53597 \begin_inset space ~
53601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53603 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
53609 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
53610 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53614 The sizes are explained in detail in section
53615 \begin_inset space ~
53619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53621 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
53629 \begin_layout Subsection
53631 \begin_inset Index idx
53636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53638 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53654 \begin_inset Index idx
53659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53661 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53678 \begin_layout Standard
53679 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
53680 by choosing an item in the list and selecting the
53687 \begin_layout Standard
53688 By checking the option
53692 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
53700 \begin_inset space ~
53704 \begin_inset space ~
53709 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
53712 \begin_layout Subsection
53714 \begin_inset Index idx
53719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53721 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53738 \begin_layout Standard
53739 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
53743 \begin_layout Standard
53748 enables previewing snippets of your document.
53749 This feature is described in section
53750 \begin_inset space ~
53754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53756 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
53764 \begin_layout Standard
53765 Checking the option
53768 \begin_inset space ~
53772 \begin_inset space ~
53776 \begin_inset space ~
53781 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
53784 \begin_layout Section
53786 \begin_inset Index idx
53791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53793 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53810 \begin_layout Subsection
53814 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53818 \begin_layout Standard
53821 Cursor follows scrollbar
53823 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when scrolling.
53826 \begin_layout Standard
53827 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
53828 If you set the value to zero,
53829 the thickness of the cursor scales relative to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
53832 \begin_layout Standard
53835 Scroll below end of document
53837 is self-explanatory.
53840 \begin_layout Standard
53841 In \SpecialChar LyX
53842 one can jump from word to word by pressing
53849 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
53851 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
53852 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
53855 \begin_layout Standard
53858 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
53860 is only relevant in documents that
53866 change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is (keeping
53874 markup) with this option selected.
53875 It the option is not selected,
53876 pasted text will be inserted without any markup (i.
53877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53882 \begin_inset Quotes els
53886 \begin_inset Quotes ers
53890 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
53891 dissolving from insets.
53902 \begin_inset Quotes els
53906 \begin_inset Quotes ers
53909 notwithstanding the state of this option.
53912 \begin_layout Standard
53915 Sort environments alphabetically
53917 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
53920 \begin_layout Standard
53923 Group environments by their category
53925 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
53928 \begin_layout Standard
53933 options determine the editing style for math macros,
53945 \begin_layout Standard
53948 Search drive for cited files
53950 allows \SpecialChar LyX
53951 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
53954 \begin_inset space ~
53958 \begin_inset space ~
53962 \begin_inset space ~
53966 \begin_inset space ~
53969 Content\SpecialChar ldots
53972 context menu on a citation.
53977 field determines the search pattern.
53979 \begin_inset space ~
53983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53985 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
53993 \begin_layout Subsection
53995 \begin_inset Index idx
54000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54007 \begin_inset Index idx
54012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54014 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54031 \begin_layout Standard
54036 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
54038 Several binding files are available,
54042 \begin_layout Description
54043 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
54046 \begin_layout Description
54047 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
54058 \begin_layout Description
54059 mac.bind a set of bindings for
54062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54070 \begin_layout Standard
54071 There are also binding files designed for special document classes,
54077 and binding files for special languages.
54078 The names of language binding files begin with a language code,
54080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54084 \begin_inset space \space{}
54088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54096 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
54097 in a certain language,
54099 will try to use the appropriate binding file.
54102 \begin_layout Standard
54103 Some binding files,
54109 only have a limited scope.
54110 When looking at the end of the file
54115 you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
54118 \begin_layout Standard
54122 \begin_inset space ~
54126 \begin_inset space ~
54131 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function in the selected key binding file.
54134 \begin_layout Subsubsection
54136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54138 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
54143 \begin_inset Index idx
54148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54150 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54167 \begin_layout Standard
54168 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
54169 functions and the bound shortcuts.
54170 To find functions easily,
54171 they are grouped by categories and the dialog provides the field
54173 Show key-bindings containing
54176 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
54177 Insert there for example as keyword
54178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54185 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different functions that contain
54186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54195 one function can have more than one shortcut.
54196 All \SpecialChar LyX
54197 functions are also listed in the file
54202 that you will find in the
54209 \begin_layout Standard
54211 to add the shortcut
54220 select the function and press the
54225 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
54226 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
54229 \begin_layout Standard
54230 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
54231 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
54232 Function definition with “
54234 command-alternatives
54236 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated list.
54238 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document part.
54241 \begin_layout Standard
54242 If you don't like a particular shortcut,
54246 \begin_layout Standard
54247 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with a text editor.
54248 The syntax of the entries is:
54251 \begin_layout Standard
54257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54276 \begin_layout Standard
54279 that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
54280 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
54281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54314 respectively) as well as to the other keys.
54315 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly in the definition of the key combination,
54316 but must use commands following the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for a model).
54317 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
54322 you needed to specify it as
54327 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings,
54328 you don't have to care for these specifics.
54330 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
54333 \begin_layout Subsection
54335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54337 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
54342 \begin_inset Index idx
54347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54354 \begin_inset Index idx
54359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54361 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54378 \begin_layout Standard
54379 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
54380 For the case where this is not possible,
54382 provides keyboard maps.
54385 you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it is a Romanian one,
54389 \begin_inset space ~
54393 \begin_inset space ~
54398 and select the keyboard map file named
54405 \begin_layout Standard
54420 you can select the first and second with
54423 arg "keymap-primary"
54429 arg "keymap-secondary"
54432 respectively or toggle between them with
54435 arg "keymap-toggle"
54441 \begin_layout Standard
54442 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
54445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54451 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all systems.
54459 \begin_layout Standard
54460 You can also specify the mouse
54462 Wheel scrolling speed
54465 The standard value is 1.0;
54466 higher values speed up the scrolling,
54467 lower ones slow it down.
54470 Middle mouse button pasting
54472 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel) inserts the content of the clipboard.
54475 \begin_layout Standard
54483 \begin_inset space ~
54487 \begin_inset space ~
54493 you can select a key for zooming.
54494 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated,
54495 the text is zoomed.
54498 \begin_layout Subsection
54502 \begin_layout Standard
54503 Input completion is described in section
54504 \begin_inset space ~
54508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54510 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
54518 \begin_layout Section
54520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54527 \begin_inset Index idx
54532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54539 \begin_inset Index idx
54544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54546 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54563 \begin_layout Standard
54564 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
54565 are normally determined during the installation.
54566 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
54569 \begin_layout Description
54571 \begin_inset space ~
54574 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
54575 's working directory.
54576 It is the default when you
54588 \begin_inset space ~
54596 \begin_layout Description
54598 \begin_inset space ~
54601 templates This directory contains the templates that are shown in
54603 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
54605 \begin_inset space ~
54609 \begin_inset space ~
54617 \begin_layout Description
54619 \begin_inset space ~
54622 files This directory contains the example files that are listed in
54624 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
54630 \begin_layout Description
54632 \begin_inset space ~
54636 \begin_inset Index idx
54641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54643 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54657 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
54658 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
54659 \begin_inset space ~
54663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54665 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
54675 will be used to save the backups.
54676 \begin_inset Newline newline
54679 Backup files have the ending
54680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54690 \begin_layout Description
54692 \begin_inset space ~
54695 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
54696 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
54698 \begin_inset Newline newline
54706 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54712 You can edit this file with the program
54721 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
54722 in its preferences under
54725 \begin_inset space ~
54731 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation,
54736 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
54738 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position in your \SpecialChar LyX
54745 and \SpecialChar LyX
54746 need to be running the same time.
54747 \begin_inset Newline newline
54750 The pipe is also used for the
54756 \begin_inset space ~
54760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54762 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
54768 \begin_inset Newline newline
54771 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
54772 Server-Pipe on Windows,
54773 you must use this pipe name:
54774 \begin_inset Newline newline
54790 \begin_layout Description
54792 \begin_inset space ~
54795 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
54798 \begin_layout Description
54800 \begin_inset space ~
54803 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
54804 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
54807 \begin_layout Description
54809 \begin_inset space ~
54812 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
54817 You only need to specify it if you are using
54821 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
54822 For \SpecialChar LyX
54827 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying a directory.
54830 \begin_layout Description
54832 \begin_inset space ~
54835 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
54836 When \SpecialChar LyX
54837 needs to use an external program,
54838 it looks in this list to see where to find it on the system.
54839 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
54841 so you normally don't have to modify it.
54843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54851 the path list will need to be set only if there are external programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
54854 \begin_layout Description
54856 \begin_inset space ~
54859 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
54860 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
54861 code or in the document preamble.
54862 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by a single dot '.').
54863 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
54864 If files are included,
54865 the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be scanned for the input files.
54866 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
54868 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths;
54869 otherwise compilation may fail for some documents.
54872 \begin_layout Section
54876 \begin_layout Standard
54877 Here you can insert your
54886 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking,
54887 as described in section
54888 \begin_inset space ~
54892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54894 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
54900 to mark changes you make as yours.
54903 \begin_layout Section
54905 \begin_inset Index idx
54910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54912 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54927 \begin_inset Index idx
54932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54934 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54951 \begin_layout Subsection
54953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54955 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
54962 \begin_layout Description
54964 \begin_inset space ~
54968 \begin_inset space ~
54971 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
54973 You can find its actual translation status here:
54975 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54977 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
54985 \begin_layout Subsubsection
54986 LaTeX Language Support
54989 \begin_layout Description
54991 \begin_inset space ~
54994 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
54995 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
54996 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
54997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55013 The most widespread language package is
55018 \begin_inset Index idx
55023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55026 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55041 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
55043 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
55044 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55045 come with the alternative language package
55050 \begin_inset Index idx
55055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55058 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55072 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
55074 there are also specific language packages for languages not covered by
55079 The available selections are described in section
55080 \begin_inset space ~
55084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55086 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
55094 \begin_layout Description
55096 \begin_inset space ~
55099 start Here you customize the command that is used to switch to a different language.
55100 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
55104 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
55105 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands,
55108 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
55112 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
55120 which needs the start command
55135 selectlanguage{$$lang}
55142 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55149 this setting is ignored.
55152 \begin_layout Description
55154 \begin_inset space ~
55157 end Use this if the language switch set in
55161 needs to be explicitly ended,
55166 's alternative command
55170 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
55171 \SpecialChar allowbreak
55174 end{otherlanguage*}
55182 selectlanguage{$$lang}
55184 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the next
55188 selectlanguage{$$lang}
55196 this setting is ignored.
55199 \begin_layout Description
55201 \begin_inset space ~
55205 \begin_inset space ~
55208 globally If this option is set,
55209 the languages used in the document will be added to the document class options rather than the language package options.
55210 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
55212 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this way.
55215 \begin_layout Description
55217 \begin_inset space ~
55221 \begin_inset space ~
55225 \begin_inset space ~
55228 explicitly If this option is set,
55229 the language switch defined in
55232 \begin_inset space ~
55237 is output at the beginning of the document,
55238 thereby explicitly switching to the document language.
55239 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
55240 This might be needed if you use a non-default
55243 \begin_inset space ~
55248 or if a package resets the document language.
55250 the language that is active at document start is used (this usually should be the document language).
55253 \begin_layout Description
55255 \begin_inset space ~
55259 \begin_inset space ~
55263 \begin_inset space ~
55266 explicitly Counterpart to
55268 Set document language explicitly
55275 \begin_inset space ~
55280 is output at the end of the document.
55283 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55284 \paragraph_spacing single
55288 \begin_layout Description
55290 \begin_inset space ~
55294 \begin_inset space ~
55298 all text in a language different to the document language will be marked (by default with a blue underline).
55301 \begin_layout Description
55303 \begin_inset space ~
55307 \begin_inset space ~
55310 movement Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves when writing scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g.,
55317 \begin_layout Standard
55322 means that the cursor follows the logic of the text direction,
55323 and the arrows' direction relates to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
55325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55329 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say,
55330 Hebrew embedded in English),
55331 the cursor starts at the right (that is,
55336 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the left.
55337 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part;
55338 right arrow in this specific case always means:
55343 in text (even if this means:
55349 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left scripts,
55350 since the cursor then follows a coherent
55351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55361 \begin_layout Standard
55367 always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
55369 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
55370 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
55375 ) when coming from the left.
55376 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases,
55377 at the expense of the text logic.
55381 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55385 \begin_layout Description
55387 \begin_inset space ~
55391 \begin_inset space ~
55394 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal separator alignment).
55396 the appropriate character for the current language is selected (e.
55397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55403 but you can also specify a specific (static) custom character here.
55406 \begin_layout Description
55408 \begin_inset space ~
55412 \begin_inset space ~
55415 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
55419 \begin_layout Subsection
55423 \begin_layout Standard
55424 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
55425 \begin_inset space ~
55429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55431 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
55439 \begin_layout Section
55443 \begin_layout Subsection
55445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55447 name "subsec:General-output"
55454 \begin_layout Description
55456 \begin_inset space ~
55459 search Commands that will be used for the menu
55461 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
55463 \begin_inset space ~
55469 For a detailed description see section
55471 Reverse DVI/PDF search
55476 \begin_inset space ~
55484 \begin_layout Description
55486 \begin_inset space ~
55489 Options Options for the program
55493 that is used for the export format
55499 \begin_inset space ~
55503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55505 reference "subsec:Export"
55511 Possible options are listed in the
55516 \begin_inset Newline newline
55520 \begin_inset Flex URL
55523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55525 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
55535 \begin_layout Description
55537 \begin_inset space ~
55541 \begin_inset space ~
55544 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using the menu
55546 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
55547 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
55549 \begin_inset space ~
55555 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
55558 \begin_layout Description
55560 \begin_inset space ~
55564 \begin_inset space ~
55567 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
55568 is allowed to overwrite on export.
55571 \begin_layout Subsection
55577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55579 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
55584 \begin_inset Index idx
55589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55591 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55609 \begin_layout Description
55611 \begin_inset space ~
55615 \begin_inset space ~
55619 \begin_inset space ~
55623 \begin_inset space ~
55626 options They only have an effect when the program
55630 is used as DVI-viewer,
55631 read its manual to find out more.
55634 \begin_layout Standard
55635 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
55636 But before you change something,
55637 it is strongly recommended to read the manuals of the applications.
55640 \begin_layout Description
55642 \begin_inset space ~
55645 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography,
55647 \begin_inset space ~
55651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55653 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
55661 \begin_layout Description
55663 \begin_inset space ~
55666 generation Settings for the generation of the index,
55668 \begin_inset space ~
55672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55674 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
55682 \begin_layout Description
55684 \begin_inset space ~
55687 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature,
55689 \begin_inset space ~
55693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55695 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
55703 \begin_layout Description
55709 \begin_inset space ~
55712 command Command for the program
55714 Check\SpecialChar TeX
55717 that is described in the section
55719 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
55724 Additional Features
55729 \begin_layout Standard
55730 There are additionally the following options:
55733 \begin_layout Description
55735 \begin_inset space ~
55739 \begin_inset space ~
55743 \begin_inset space ~
55747 \begin_inset space ~
55752 \begin_inset space ~
55755 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows,
55757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55774 to separate folders.
55775 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
55777 \begin_inset Index idx
55782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55789 \begin_inset Index idx
55794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55796 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55813 \begin_layout Description
55815 \begin_inset space ~
55819 \begin_inset space ~
55823 \begin_inset space ~
55827 \begin_inset space ~
55831 \begin_inset space ~
55835 \begin_inset space ~
55838 changes Removes all manually set
55844 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
55845 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
55847 \begin_inset space ~
55852 dialog when changing the document class.
55855 \begin_layout Section
55857 \begin_inset space ~
55861 \begin_inset Index idx
55866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55875 \begin_layout Subsection
55877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55879 name "subsec:Converters"
55884 \begin_inset Index idx
55889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55898 \begin_layout Standard
55899 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material from one format to another.
55900 You can modify converters or create new ones.
55901 To modify a converter,
55903 change the entry of the
55910 \begin_inset space ~
55915 field and press the
55920 To create a new converter,
55921 select an existing one,
55922 select a different format in the
55925 \begin_inset space ~
55935 field and press the
55942 \begin_layout Standard
55945 Converter File Cache
55952 conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
55954 Maximum Age (in days
55957 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen a document;
55958 the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
55961 \begin_layout Standard
55962 More about converters,
55963 like the flags that can be used in the converter definition,
55964 is described in the section
55975 \begin_layout Subsection
55977 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55979 name "sec:File-Formats"
55984 \begin_inset Index idx
55989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55996 \begin_inset Index idx
56001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56010 \begin_layout Standard
56011 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
56021 programs that should be used for certain formats.
56024 \begin_layout Standard
56025 You can also define the
56027 Default output format
56029 that is used when you use
56033 View Master Document
56037 Update Master Document
56043 menu or the toolbar.
56046 \begin_layout Standard
56047 More about formats and their options is described in the section
56058 \begin_layout Standard
56059 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
56060 's temporary directory,
56061 it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
56062 This is done by specifying a
56067 More about this is described in the section
56078 \begin_layout Chapter
56079 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
56081 \begin_inset Index idx
56086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56095 name "chap:Units-available-in"
56102 \begin_layout Standard
56104 \begin_inset space ~
56108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56110 reference "tab:Units"
56115 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
56116 and used in this documentation.
56119 \begin_layout Standard
56120 \begin_inset Float table
56127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56128 \begin_inset Caption Standard
56130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56146 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
56152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56154 \begin_inset Tabular
56155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
56156 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
56157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
56158 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
56159 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
56161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56312 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
56316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56547 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56551 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56583 scaled point (65536
56584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56651 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
56656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56775 % of original image width
56780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56864 \begin_layout Standard
56865 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
56868 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
56875 \begin_layout Bibliography
56876 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56877 LatexCommand bibitem
56884 The \SpecialChar LyX
56887 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56890 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
56896 \begin_inset Newline newline
56900 \begin_inset Flex URL
56903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56905 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
56913 \begin_layout Bibliography
56914 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56915 LatexCommand bibitem
56916 key "latexcompanion"
56921 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
56924 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
56925 Companion Second Edition.
56932 \begin_layout Bibliography
56933 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56934 LatexCommand bibitem
56940 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
56944 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
56952 \begin_layout Bibliography
56953 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56954 LatexCommand bibitem
56965 A Document Preparation System.
56973 \begin_layout Bibliography
56974 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56975 LatexCommand bibitem
56985 The \SpecialChar TeX
56993 \begin_layout Bibliography
56994 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56995 LatexCommand bibitem
57001 The \SpecialChar TeX
57003 \begin_inset Newline newline
57007 \begin_inset Flex URL
57010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57012 https://ctan.org/topic
57020 \begin_layout Bibliography
57021 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57022 LatexCommand bibitem
57028 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
57030 \begin_inset Newline newline
57034 \begin_inset Flex URL
57037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57039 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
57047 \begin_layout Bibliography
57048 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57049 LatexCommand bibitem
57056 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57058 name "Documentation"
57059 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
57066 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
57070 \begin_inset Newline newline
57074 \begin_inset Flex URL
57077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57079 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
57087 \begin_layout Bibliography
57088 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57089 LatexCommand bibitem
57096 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57098 name "Documentation"
57099 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
57104 how to use the program
57106 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
57110 \begin_inset Newline newline
57114 \begin_inset Flex URL
57117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57119 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
57127 \begin_layout Bibliography
57128 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57129 LatexCommand bibitem
57136 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57138 name "Documentation"
57139 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
57144 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57150 \begin_inset Index idx
57155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57158 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57173 \begin_inset Newline newline
57177 \begin_inset Flex URL
57180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57182 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
57190 \begin_layout Bibliography
57191 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57192 LatexCommand bibitem
57199 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57201 name "Documentation"
57202 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
57207 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57213 \begin_inset Index idx
57218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57221 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57236 \begin_inset Newline newline
57240 \begin_inset Flex URL
57243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57245 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
57253 \begin_layout Bibliography
57254 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57255 LatexCommand bibitem
57262 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57264 name "Documentation"
57265 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
57275 \begin_inset Newline newline
57279 \begin_inset Flex URL
57282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57284 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
57292 \begin_layout Bibliography
57293 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57294 LatexCommand bibitem
57295 key "makeindex-man"
57301 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57304 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
57314 \begin_inset Newline newline
57318 \begin_inset Flex URL
57321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57323 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
57331 \begin_layout Bibliography
57332 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57333 LatexCommand bibitem
57340 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57342 name "Documentation"
57343 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf"
57353 \begin_inset Newline newline
57357 \begin_inset Flex URL
57360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57362 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf
57370 \begin_layout Bibliography
57371 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57372 LatexCommand bibitem
57379 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57381 name "Documentation"
57382 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
57392 \begin_inset Newline newline
57396 \begin_inset Flex URL
57399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57401 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
57409 \begin_layout Bibliography
57410 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57411 LatexCommand bibitem
57418 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57420 name "Documentation"
57421 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
57426 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
57428 \begin_inset Newline newline
57432 \begin_inset Flex URL
57435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57437 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
57445 \begin_layout Bibliography
57446 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57447 LatexCommand bibitem
57454 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57456 name "Documentation"
57457 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
57462 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57468 \begin_inset Index idx
57473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57476 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57491 \begin_inset Newline newline
57495 \begin_inset Flex URL
57498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57500 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
57508 \begin_layout Bibliography
57509 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57510 LatexCommand bibitem
57517 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57519 name "Documentation"
57520 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
57525 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57531 \begin_inset Index idx
57536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57539 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57554 \begin_inset Newline newline
57558 \begin_inset Flex URL
57561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57563 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
57571 \begin_layout Bibliography
57572 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57573 LatexCommand bibitem
57580 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57582 name "Documentation"
57583 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
57588 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57594 \begin_inset Index idx
57599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57602 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57617 \begin_inset Newline newline
57621 \begin_inset Flex URL
57624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57626 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
57634 \begin_layout Bibliography
57635 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57636 LatexCommand bibitem
57643 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57645 name "Documentation"
57646 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
57651 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57657 \begin_inset Index idx
57662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57665 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57680 \begin_inset Newline newline
57684 \begin_inset Flex URL
57687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57689 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
57697 \begin_layout Bibliography
57698 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57699 LatexCommand bibitem
57706 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57708 name "Documentation"
57709 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
57714 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57720 \begin_inset Index idx
57725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57728 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57743 \begin_inset Newline newline
57747 \begin_inset Flex URL
57750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57752 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
57760 \begin_layout Bibliography
57761 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57762 LatexCommand bibitem
57769 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57771 name "Documentation"
57772 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
57777 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57783 \begin_inset Index idx
57788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57791 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57806 \begin_inset Newline newline
57810 \begin_inset Flex URL
57813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57815 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
57823 \begin_layout Bibliography
57824 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57825 LatexCommand bibitem
57832 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57834 name "Documentation"
57835 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
57840 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57846 \begin_inset Index idx
57851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57854 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57869 \begin_inset Newline newline
57873 \begin_inset Flex URL
57876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57878 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
57886 \begin_layout Bibliography
57887 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57888 LatexCommand bibitem
57895 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57897 name "Documentation"
57898 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
57903 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57909 \begin_inset Index idx
57914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57917 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57932 \begin_inset Newline newline
57936 \begin_inset Flex URL
57939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57941 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
57949 \begin_layout Bibliography
57950 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57951 LatexCommand bibitem
57958 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57961 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
57966 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
57968 \begin_inset Newline newline
57972 \begin_inset Flex URL
57975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57977 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
57985 \begin_layout Bibliography
57986 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57987 LatexCommand bibitem
57994 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57997 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
58002 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58004 \begin_inset Newline newline
58008 \begin_inset Flex URL
58011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58013 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
58021 \begin_layout Bibliography
58022 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58023 LatexCommand bibitem
58030 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58033 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
58038 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58039 for Cyrillic languages:
58040 \begin_inset Newline newline
58044 \begin_inset Flex URL
58047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58049 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
58057 \begin_layout Bibliography
58058 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58059 LatexCommand bibitem
58066 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58069 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
58074 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58076 \begin_inset Newline newline
58080 \begin_inset Flex URL
58083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58085 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
58093 \begin_layout Bibliography
58094 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58095 LatexCommand bibitem
58102 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58105 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
58110 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58112 \begin_inset Newline newline
58116 \begin_inset Flex URL
58119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58121 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
58129 \begin_layout Bibliography
58130 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58131 LatexCommand bibitem
58138 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58141 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
58146 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58148 \begin_inset Newline newline
58152 \begin_inset Flex URL
58155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58157 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
58165 \begin_layout Standard
58166 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
58173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58201 \begin_inset Note Note
58204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58211 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
58212 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following bibliography is the second one:
58220 \begin_layout Standard
58221 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
58222 LatexCommand bibtex
58223 btprint "btPrintCited"
58224 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
58233 \begin_layout Standard
58234 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
58238 \begin_layout Standard
58242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58248 pagedeclaration}[1]{
58251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58258 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
58266 \begin_inset Note Note
58269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58270 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink,
58272 \begin_inset space ~
58276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58278 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
58291 \begin_layout Standard
58292 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
58293 LatexCommand printnomenclature
58299 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
58300 LatexCommand printindex